In the Kitch

menu icon
go to homepage
  • Patriotic Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Guides
  • Tutorials
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Patriotic Recipes
    • Recipe Index
    • Guides
    • Tutorials
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • YouTube
  • ×
    In the Kitch » Recipes

    Peach Freezer Jam (Low Sugar)

    July 26, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    This easy, low sugar, peach freezer jam can last for up to 1 year in the freezer. It still has the same sweet, peachy flavor as canned jam but with a fresher taste and more vibrant color because the peaches do not get cooked. Check out how to make it below as well as some juicy tips and information.

    Peach freezer jam in a small jar with fresh peach slices on the side.

    I think you'll love this alternative way to make peach jam. I personally like that I can avoid the cooking step and lock in all of the fresh flavor. If the amount of sugar added to regular jams frightens you, make this delicious, lower sugar version instead.

    You can check out more of my homemade condiments here.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🫙 What is the Difference Between Freezer Jam and Traditional Jam?

    While the ingredients are pretty much the same, there are a few main differences between these two jams:

    • No-Cook: While traditional jam cooks fresh fruit, sugar and other ingredients together, freezer jam does not cook the ingredients. The result is freezer jam will keep its color and fresh flavor.
    • Low Sugar: One of my favorite reasons to make freezer jam is that you can use less sugar.
    • Thickness: Both jams get their thickness from pectin (a necessary ingredient). Traditional jam should set after 24 to 48 hours. Freezer jams tend to be thinner in consistency and set after only 30 minutes or less. Some brands of freezer jam pectin don't require any resting time to set.
    • Sterilization: You don't need to sterilize the jars for freezer jam whereas it is required for cooked jam.
    • Shelf Stability: Freezer jam is not shelf stable and needs to be put in the fridge for up to 3 weeks or in the freezer for up to 1 year, hence the name. Traditional jam is shelf stable and doesn't require refrigeration until the sealed jar has been opened.

    🍑 Ingredients

    Peach freezer jam ingredients labeled.

    This easy recipe for no-cook freezer jam uses only 4 basic ingredients:

    • peaches - fresh and firm-ripe
    • sugar - I use white granulated sugar and have not tested it with other sweeteners
    • lime juice - freshly squeezed
    • freezer jam pectin powder - when mixed with sugar and acid it thickens/gels the jam (make sure you buy the freezer jam/no cook type)

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    You will also need 4 clean half pint jam jars for this recipe or whatever size jam jars you have on hand.

    🥣 How to Make Peach Freezer Jam

    Diced peach jam mixture in bowl.

    Step 1. Combine peach mixture. Mix the peaches, lime juice and sugar in a bowl and stir until combined well. Let rest for 10 minutes.

    Peach jam mixture in bowl with pectin powder.

    Step 2. Add pectin. Slowly sprinkle the pectin powder over the peaches and stir for 5 minutes, making sure the sugar has completely dissolved. It will get thicker as you mix.

    Peach freezer jam in jam jars.

    Step 3. Transfer to jars. Transfer the peach jam to glass jars, leaving ½" to 1" of space at the top, and then screw the lids on. Let the jam sit for 30 minutes to thicken.

    Peach freezer jam and cream cheese on a piece of toast.

    Step 4. Freeze. You can either use it right away or store in the freezer for up to 1 year or in the fridge for up to 3 weeks. Spread it on bread, bagels, homemade toast points, a jelly roll, over ice cream or yogurt etc.

    Chef's Note: Some brands of freezer jam pectin do not need resting. Check the package to confirm.

    🔪 Tips on Peeling the Peaches

    Since this peach freezer jam recipe uses fresh peaches (just like my peach tarte tatin recipe), they should be peeled, but their thin skin can make the task difficult.

    • If they are ripe but still firm, you can simply use a vegetable peeler.
    • If they are quite soft, it's best to blanch and peel. You can follow these directions to make peeling peaches easier:
    1. Make an Ice Bath. Be sure to have an ice bath ready before you start.
    2. Boil Water. Boil a pot of water that has enough room to fit several peaches (about 7 or 8 medium peaches for this recipe).
    3. Blanch. Bring the water down to a simmer and carefully put the peaches in the water. Blanch them for 30 seconds, then carefully take the peaches out and put them in the ice bath; this stops the cooking process, also known as shocking them. Leave the peaches to cool.
    4. Peel. Use a small knife to cut an x-shaped slit on top of each peach, then gently peel the skin off with your hands.
    5. Chop. From there, you can cut them in half, take the pits out, and chop the fruit.

    ✅ Recipe Tips

    • I like to make sure the peaches are chopped finely for this recipe because this makes it easier to spread the jam onto your toast or bagel. If you like bigger chunks in your jam, chop larger pieces.
    • Please do not adjust the ingredient amounts or this could result in the jam not setting properly.
    • Make sure to label the jam jars so that you know how long they've been in the freezer.

    ❓ Peach Freezer Jam FAQs

    Do peaches need to be peeled for jam?

    Peeling the peaches or not is a personal choice. Leaving the peel on can add more peach flavor and color but some people don't like the texture, especially in no-cook jam.

    Can I freeze peaches and then make jam later?

    You can use frozen peaches to make jam; I recommend doing the pitting and peeling ahead of time.

    Why is my peach freezer jam runny?

    With the way freezer jam is made, it tends to be a little runnier than regular jam. Some other factors are how much pectin was added and how ripe the peaches are; over ripe peaches will have less pectin.

    Peach freezer jam in jam jar with spoon.

    🧡 More Juicy Peach Recipes to Try

    • Peach cobbler in electric skillet.
      Electric Skillet Peach Cobbler
    • Champagne glasses with peach bellini.
      Easy Peach Bellini Recipe
    • Iced peach green tea in glass with straw and peach garnish.
      Iced Peach Green Tea
    • Grilled peaches wrapped in prosciutto on serving dish.
      Grilled Prosciutto Wrapped Peaches (With Balsamic)

    If you tried this 🍑 Low Sugar Peach Freezer Jam Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Peach freezer jam in jam jar with the lid off.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Peach Freezer Jam (Low Sugar)

    This easy, low sugar, peach freezer jam can last for up to 1 year in the freezer. It still has the same sweet, peachy flavor as canned jam but with a fresher taste and more vibrant color because the peaches do not get cooked.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt, Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 64 tablespoons
    Calories 24kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 4 clean half pint jars

    Ingredients

    • 3 ½ cups fresh firm-ripe peaches pitted, peeled and finely chopped (about 7 or 8 medium peaches)
    • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice
    • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar
    • 1.6 ounces freezer jam pectin powder 1 package
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Mix the peaches, lime juice and sugar in a bowl and stir until combined well. Let rest for 10 minutes.
      3 ½ cups fresh firm-ripe peaches, 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice, 1 ½ cups granulated sugar
    • Gradually sprinkle the pectin powder over the peaches and stir for 5 minutes, making sure the sugar has completely dissolved. It will get thicker as you mix.
      1.6 ounces freezer jam pectin powder
    • Transfer the peach jam to glass jam jars, leaving ½" to 1" of space at the top, and then screw the lids on.
    • Let the jam sit for 30 minutes to thicken. (Some brands of freezer jam pectin do not need resting. Check the package to confirm.) Use or store.

    Notes

    • This recipe makes approximately 4 cups of jam.
    • The jam can be stored in the freezer for up to 1 year or in the fridge for up to 3 weeks.
    • Make sure to label the jam jars so that you know how long they've been in the freezer.
    • Freezer jams tend to be thinner in consistency compared to traditional.
    • Nutrition information is per tablespoon.
    • Spread it on bread, bagels, homemade toast points, over ice cream or yogurt etc.
    • Please do not adjust the ingredient amounts or this could result in the jam not setting properly.
    • Tips on peeling the peaches:
      • If they are ripe but still firm, you can simply use a vegetable peeler.
      • If they are quite soft, it's best to blanch and peel. You can follow the directions in the post.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 24kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.04g | Saturated Fat: 0.002g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 11mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 28IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Bison Brisket Nachos

    July 19, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Load up your plate with these filling bison brisket nachos! Bubbling cheese melts into the hearty bison brisket and crunchy tortilla chips as your nachos bake in the oven. After a smoked brisket dinner, these nachos offer a tasty way to use up your leftovers.

    Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan with toppings.

    Bison Nachos Are a Quick & Easy Meal or Appetizer

    These nachos are very similar to this carne asada nachos recipe, with leftover meat as the star topping alongside fresh ingredients for incredible flavor and texture. After gathering the ingredients it bakes in about 10 minutes, making this a delicious and quick 20-minute meal or appetizer option.

    This bison recipe offers enough food for an entree, but nachos also make a quick, tasty appetizer before the main event. You can expect about 6 servings as an appetizer or 4 servings as a main.

    Your guests can grab a handful while they're standing around and talking. The shredded cheese holds up better than cheese sauce and doesn't soften the tortilla chips, allowing you to eat with less mess and savor the flavors.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Bison brisket nachos ingredients labeled on wooden background.
    • tortilla chips - Regular, lightly salted tortilla chips work great.
    • Monterey Jack cheese - I love how this cheese melts but you could also use mozzarella or cheddar.
    • leftover bison brisket - You can use smoked or not but smoked brisket is ideal.
    • corn kernels - Can use canned, frozen or grilled for some added smoky flavor (check out how to grill corn here).
    • Roma tomatoes - I like using Roma for their low water content but you can use sliced cherry or grape tomatoes as well.
    • red onion - Can substitute with white onion if desired.
    • fresh cilantro - This is optional. Check out more cilantro recipes here.
    • condiments and other toppings - Pick your favorite condiments and toppings for nachos such as salsa, sour cream, Mexican guacamole and hot sauce. What I've listed is optional but include all of my faves. You can try different Mexican cuisine staples to change it up, including bell peppers, chili peppers, black beans, refried beans, sliced avocados and various cheeses. See this vegetarian skillet nachos recipe for more ideas.

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    How to Make Bison Brisket Nachos

    Tortilla chips in cast iron pan.

    Step 1. Preheat oven and add chips to pan. Preheat the oven to 350°F and scatter the tortilla chips in a 12" cast iron skillet or on a baking sheet.

    Tortilla chips, cheese and bison brisket layered in cast iron pan.

    Step 2. Bake the bison nachos. Top with the cheese and then shredded brisket. Bake for 10 minutes in the preheated oven or until the cheese melts.

    Bison brisket nachos with fresh toppings assembled in cast iron pan.

    Step 3. Add fresh toppings. Add the corn, tomatoes, onions, fresh cilantro and pickled jalapenos (if using).

    Bison brisket nachos with fresh toppings and condiments, assembled in cast iron pan.

    Step 4. Serve. Serve the bison brisket nachos with your favorite condiments on the side such as sour cream, salsa, guacamole and tomatillo hot sauce.

    Joss' Top Tips

    • Here's a tip I got from the local butcher: If you cannot get your hands on a brisket or are simply looking to save some money for a cut with similar results, ask your butcher to cut an outside round flat bison roast (aka. bottom round) with the fat cap.
    • Side condiments: If you're serving a group, consider offering the vegetable toppings and condiments on the side instead of adding them to the nachos so that your guests can customize their plates. This way you also avoid any sogginess before digging in.
    • Drink pairing: Consider enjoying your nachos with a hearty beer or Mexican cocktail like these frozen margaritas.
    • Dessert pairing: For dessert, try out these margarita cake pops to match the Mexican theme. They're a party food staple!
    • Plating: Break out your brightest, most colorful plates and glasses for a festive touch.

    Storage & Reheating

    Bison brisket nachos are best when consumed immediately but if you do have leftovers, they should be stored covered in the refrigerator. The nachos can be reheated in the oven to enjoy for up to two to three days.

    Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan with toppings and dips on the side.

    More Delicious Bison Recipes

    • Bison chanterelle mushroom meat sauce in jar.
      Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce
    • Bison meatballs with BBQ sauce and parsley.
      Bison Meatballs
    • BBQ bison short ribs on plate.
      Bison Short Ribs
    • Bison chili with toppings in cast iron dish.
      Slow Cooker Bison Chili

    If you tried this Bison Brisket Nachos Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Bison Brisket Nachos

    Load up your plate with these filling bison brisket nachos! After a smoked brisket dinner, these nachos offer a tasty way to use up your leftovers.
    Course Appetizer, Main Course
    Cuisine American, Canadian, Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 1038kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 8 cups tortilla chips
    • 3 cups Monterey Jack cheese shredded
    • 2 cups leftover bison brisket shredded - can use smoked or not
    • ½ cup corn kernels
    • ½ cup roma tomatoes diced
    • ⅓ cup red onion finely diced
    • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped
    • ¼ cup sliced pickled jalapenos optional
    • desired condiments such as sour cream, salsa, guacamole and hot sauce
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Place the tortilla chips in a 12" cast iron skillet or on a baking sheet. Top the chips with the cheese and then shredded brisket.
      8 cups tortilla chips, 3 cups Monterey Jack cheese, 2 cups leftover bison brisket
    • Bake for 10 minutes in the preheated oven or until the cheese melts.
    • Add the corn, tomatoes, onions, fresh cilantro and pickled jalapenos (if using).
      ½ cup corn kernels, ½ cup roma tomatoes, ⅓ cup red onion, ¼ cup fresh cilantro, ¼ cup sliced pickled jalapenos
    • Serve with your favorite condiments on the side such as sour cream, salsa, guacamole and hot sauce.

    Notes

    • Servings: This recipe makes about 6 servings as an appetizer or 4 as a main.
    • Leftovers: These nachos are best when consumed immediately but if you do have leftovers, they should be stored covered in the refrigerator. The nachos can be reheated in the oven to enjoy for up to two to three days.
    • Drink Pairing: Consider enjoying your nachos with a hearty beer or Mexican cocktail like frozen margaritas.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 1038kcal | Carbohydrates: 108g | Protein: 42g | Fat: 51g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 17g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 99mg | Sodium: 1009mg | Potassium: 687mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 751IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 595mg | Iron: 5mg

    Electric Skillet Peach Cobbler

    July 12, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 6 Comments

    This electric skillet peach cobbler recipe is a sweet treat that can be enjoyed as an easy, 30 minute dessert. Cooking it in an electric skillet is unique compared to other cobbler recipes but it works great.

    Peach cobbler in an electric skillet on grey background.

    Skillet-Baked Peachy Summer Treat

    Texture and Technique: These days, there are different styles of cobbler. This version is made by adding the peaches to a batter. The batter will puff up around the peaches as it bakes and the juices on the bottom will become the consistency of a syrup, creating different, delicious textures that remind me a little of my peach tarte tatin recipe.

    The peaches on top, along with their juices, are nicely baked into the batter, keeping it soft and pillowy with delicious peach flavor--almost as peachy as my iced peach green tea.

    It makes for an excellent camping dessert, as do my electric skillet cookies and electric skillet brownies, because it requires mostly pantry staples, the dry ingredients can be mixed ahead of time, plus there is very little prep work before it gets baked.

    Golden Comment

    Recipe Review From Doug: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ "Camping and needed a way to use up some over ripe peaches. Came across this recipe and made it as written . Except we didn't have brown sugar or cinnamon. Turned out great."

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • butter - Feel free to use salted butter for a flavor enhancement.
    • canned sliced peaches in juice - Using canned peaches allows for extra convenience and less prep time as they are pre-peeled, pitted and sliced for you. You don't need to precook the peaches in a sugar mixture like you normally would.
    • brown sugar - Brown sugar combined with the cinnamon gives peach cobbler a little something extra to the top of the dessert.

    *See full ingredients and amounts in recipe card.

    Peach cobbler in bowls with a spoon.

    How to Make Electric Skillet Peach Cobbler

    1. Make the batter. In a large bowl, combine the flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt. Stir in the milk, just until combined.
    2. Add batter and peaches to skillet. Preheat a 12" non-stick electric skillet to 275℉ (medium-low). Add the butter to the skillet. Once melted, pour the batter into the electric skillet and even it out. Spoon the peaches with their juices on top of the batter. Sprinkle the brown sugar and cinnamon on top.
    3. Bake. Cover with the lid and cook for about 25-30 minutes, or until a toothpick comes out clean from the center. Try not to open the lid in this time.
    4. Serve. Let cool for about 10 minutes. Serve warm in bowls with a scoop of ice cream, if desired.

    🧽 Chef's Note: When you're all finished, check out how to clean an electric frying pan.

    Reheating Instructions

    Peach cobbler is a dish best served warm, so here are some options on reheating the peach cobbler:

    Electric Skillet: Add it back to the skillet on warm or low heat with the lid on until it's warmed through.

    Microwave: The quickest option is to microwave it at 30 seconds intervals until desired temperature, but keep in mind microwaving it will make the texture more soft.

    Oven: Another option is to reheat it in the oven; it will take longer, but it will reheat the dish more evenly and crisp it up a bit. First, preheat the oven to 350°F and put it in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until it is warmed through. You may also cover it with aluminum foil to keep more moisture in and avoid any browning, if desired.

    Skillet Peach Cobbler FAQs

    How long do leftovers last?

    For best results, store this peach cobbler covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days.

    What are the origins?

    Peach cobbler is a well-known southern dish and an official state food of Texas. It isn't known for certain, but it is believed that early colonists from England had limited resources from moving to another country and recreated their recipes with what was available. To extend their fruits' life and food storage, they put biscuit dough on top of them and served them at any course, not just dessert.

    Why is it called "cobbler"?

    One theory is because the biscuit dough makes it look like it is "cobbled together". Another theory is that it could be from a 14th century word "cobeler", meaning "wooden bowl or dish". The last theory is because the dessert reminds people of a cobblestone.

    Didn't find the answer you're looking for?

    Ask AI to answer based on this specific recipe:

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Peach cobbler in a bowl with a spoon.

    ❤️ More Peach Recipes You Will Love

    • Peach freezer jam in jam jar with the lid off.
      Peach Freezer Jam (Low Sugar)
    • Grilled peaches wrapped in prosciutto on serving dish.
      Grilled Prosciutto Wrapped Peaches (With Balsamic)
    • Champagne glasses with peach bellini.
      Easy Peach Bellini Recipe
    • Christmas punch in champagne glasses with wooden snowflake decorations.
      Christmas Morning Punch

    Did you enjoy this unique way of baking a cobbler? If you tried this Electric Skillet Peach Cobbler Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Peach cobbler in electric skillet.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Electric Skillet Peach Cobbler

    Cooking this peach cobbler in an electric skillet is unique compared to other cobbler recipes but it works great. The peaches on top, along with their juices, are nicely baked into the batter keeping it soft and pillowy with delicious peach flavor.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American, British
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 9
    Calories 248kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup milk
    • 6 tablespoons butter
    • 3 cups canned sliced peaches canned in fruit juice
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl, combine the flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt. Stir in the milk, just until combined. Reserve.
      1 cup all-purpose flour, 1 cup sugar, 2 teaspoons baking powder, ¼ teaspoon salt, ¾ cup milk
    • Preheat a 12" non-stick electric skillet to 275℉ (medium-low).
    • Add the butter to the skillet. Once melted, pour the batter into the electric skillet and even it out.
      6 tablespoons butter
    • Spoon the peaches with their juices on top of the batter. Sprinkle the brown sugar and cinnamon on top.
      3 cups canned sliced peaches, 2 tablespoons brown sugar, 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • Cover with the lid and cook for about 25-30 minutes, or until a toothpick comes out clean from the center. Try not to open the lid in this time.
    • Let cool for about 10 minutes. Serve warm in bowls with a scoop of ice cream, if desired.

    Notes

    • Storage: For best results, store this peach cobbler covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Reheating Instructions:
      • Electric Skillet: Add it back to the skillet on warm or low heat with the lid on until it's warmed through.
      • Microwave: The quickest option is to microwave it at 30 seconds intervals until desired temperature, but keep in mind microwaving it will make the texture more soft.
      • Oven: Another option is to reheat it in the oven; it will take longer, but it will reheat the dish more evenly and crisp it up a bit. First, preheat the oven to 350°F and put it in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until it is warmed through. You may also cover it with aluminum foil to keep more moisture in and avoid any browning, if desired.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 141mg | Potassium: 205mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 30g | Vitamin A: 434IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 75mg | Iron: 1mg

    Mac and Cheese Flavored Ice Cream

    July 6, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This mac and cheese flavored ice cream is something new and exciting for you to try! No ice cream maker is needed for this recipe and it only uses 4 ingredients.

    Mac and cheese ice cream in a loaf pan with an ice cream scoop on the side.

    Did you ever think you'd cool down on a hot day with a bowl of mac and cheese? I personally love this KD in dessert-form.

    While it does sound weird to mix ice cream with savory comfort food, you may be pleasantly surprised by its iconic, creamy, cheesy flavor resembling the dinner food we grew up on.

    You may have seen this flavor in grocery stores, but it's very easy to make at home without any special tools, so why not give it a try?

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍦Ingredients

    Mac and cheese ice cream ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • heavy cream - whipping cream also works
    • sweetened condensed milk - to sweeten the ice cream and add silky smooth texture by helping to prevent large ice crystals
    • Kraft dinner cheese powder - remove the packets from the box of KD and save the macaroni noodles for another use
    • turmeric powder - to add some extra color to the ice cream

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    🥣How to Make it

    Making this mac and cheese ice cream is very easy! It's the same process as my strawberry shortcake no churn ice cream but with a different flavor and no add ins. Its texture is smooth and velvety.

    Heavy whipping cream in bowl with electric mixer.

    Step 1. Whip. Place a 9"×5" loaf pan in the freezer while you make the ice cream. Whip the heavy cream in a large bowl with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.

    Cheese powder mixture in bowl with spoon.

    Step 2. Combine cheese powder with milk. Whisk the sweetened condensed milk with the cheese powder and turmeric in a separate bowl, until the powder is dissolved. It will be thick.

    Mac and cheese ice cream whipped in bowl with electric mixer.

    Step 3. Combine. Slowly add the mixture into the whipped cream and continue to whip until it is fully incorporated.

    Mac and cheese ice cream in loaf pan.

    Step 4. Freeze. Spread the mixture out into the loaf pan and cover with a piece of parchment paper. Return to the freezer for at least 6 hours, until frozen.

    Mac and cheese ice cream in an ice cream glass with a waffle cone.

    Step 5. Serve. To serve, scoop into bowls and enjoy! You can also scoop it into ice cream cones!

    👩🏻‍🍳This is already a crazy idea; why not take it a step further and check out my tutorial for how to make mochi ice cream? You can choose any flavor ice cream you like--mac and cheese flavor included.

    🧀Macaroni and Cheese Flavors

    If you want to get even more adventurous with this ice cream, there are a variety of mac and cheese flavors that you can test with this recipe. I haven't tried them yet, but I imagine some would be just as good as the original flavor, others not so much:

    • sharp cheddar
    • white cheddar
    • extra creamy
    • spicy
    • three cheese

    If you do try one of these flavors out, let me know how it tasted! I personally like a kimchi flavored mac and cheese, although I haven't seen that in powder form as of yet.

    ❓Recipe FAQs

    How long can you store the no churn ice cream in the freezer?

    Keep the ice cream chilled in the freezer for up to 3 to 6 months. The texture may alter over time so it is best if eaten in this timeframe.

    What does mac n cheese ice cream taste like?

    This ice cream brings the same buttery, slightly sweet taste you know from Kraft's powdered cheese. It takes you back to one of your most loved childhood food memories. Although the name of it can turn people off immediately, cheese in desserts is not an uncommon combination.

    Mac and cheese ice cream in a loaf pan with an ice cream scoop.

    ❤️More Frozen Summer Treats You Will Love

    • Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
      Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae
    • Papaya cream with cassis in wine glass.
      Papaya Cream
    • Iced lemon mousse in small jars.
      Iced Lemon Mousse
    • Homemade banana ice cream with chocolate shavings in a dessert glass.
      How to Make Banana Ice Cream

    Do you love this 🧀🍦idea or not? If you tried this Mac and Cheese Flavored Ice Cream Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Mac and cheese ice cream in loaf pan with ice cream scoop.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Mac and Cheese Flavored Ice Cream

    This mac and cheese flavored ice cream is something new and exciting for you to try! While it does sound weird to mix ice cream with savory comfort food, you may be pleasantly surprised by its iconic, creamy, cheesy flavor resembling the dinner food we grew up on.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Freeze Time 6 hours hours
    Total Time 6 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 6
    Calories 483kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric hand mixer

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups heavy cream
    • 1 can sweetened condensed milk 14 oz./300 mL
    • 2 packets Kraft Dinner cheese powder out of the boxes of KD*
    • 1 teaspoon turmeric powder for color
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Place a 9"×5" loaf pan in the freezer while you make the ice cream.
    • Whip the heavy cream in a large bowl with an electric hand mixer, until stiff peaks form.
      2 cups heavy cream
    • Whisk the sweetened condensed milk with the cheese powder and turmeric in a separate bowl, until the powder is dissolved. It will be thick. Slowly add the mixture into the whipped cream and continue to whip until it is fully incorporated.
      1 can sweetened condensed milk, 2 packets Kraft Dinner cheese powder, 1 teaspoon turmeric powder
    • Spread the mixture out into the loaf pan and cover with a piece of parchment paper. Return to the freezer for at least 6 hours or overnight (until frozen).
    • To serve, scoop into bowls and enjoy!

    Video

    Notes

    • *Leftover macaroni noodles from the boxes can be transferred to an airtight container and stored for another use.
    • Store the ice cream in the freezer for up to 3 to 6 months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 112mg | Sodium: 105mg | Potassium: 329mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 38g | Vitamin A: 1342IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 240mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    Homemade Grenadine Syrup

    July 5, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Sweeten your drinks with this homemade grenadine syrup. Fresh pomegranates and lemon juice create a rich, vibrant flavor that completes your El Presidente or Tequila Sunrise. The syrup adds a bright red hue to your beverages--perfect for tropical vibes. Plus, you can throw this syrup together in 10 minutes or less.

    Homemade grenadine syrup in a small glass jar surrounded by pomegranate seeds.

    It is essentially a pomegranate simple syrup. Typically a simple syrup has a ratio of 1:1 sugar and water. I decided to cut down on the added sugar in this recipe since the juice is already naturally sweet.

    Commercial syrups often feature glucose-fructose, plus artificial color and flavor instead of actual fruit, giving grenadine a reputation for overly sweet, artificial flavor.

    However, true grenadine syrup is complex, fruity and made from real pomegranates - which provide it with natural flavor and color. You'll add sugar and a touch of lemon juice to turn it from juice to syrup.

    I prefer this homemade grenadine syrup recipe to the store-bought version by far. Once you try the fresh stuff, it really is hard to go back.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Grenadine Syrup?

    Grenadine is a bright red syrup that adds color and flavor to alcoholic and non-alcoholic drinks, such as Shirley Temples, tequila sunrises or this Hawaiian Mai Tai recipe. It can also be used to color and sweeten desserts.

    Ingredients

    Grenadine syrup ingredients labeled on wooden background.
    • pomegranates - Will need enough to get 2 cups of juice (between 4 and 6 depending on the size) or you can buy premade juice like POM brand. If you buy premade pomegranate juice, check the label to make sure that fruit is the main ingredient, not artificial flavors and high-fructose corn syrup.
    • lemon juice - Freshly squeezed is best.
    • orange flower water - This is completely optional but it does add a touch of floral flavor that complements the syrup well.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Variations

    Once you've mastered this recipe, you can try it with different flavorings, such as:

    • lime juice instead of the lemon juice
    • rose water instead of the orange flower water

    How to Make Grenadine Syrup at Home

    Pomegranate in citrus juicer.

    Step 1. Squeeze the juice out. Cut the pomegranates into quarters or even eighths if they are large. Using an orange/lemon squeezer, squeeze the juice out of the pomegranates.

    Freshly squeezed pomegranate juice in fine mesh strainer.

    Step 2. Strain. Strain the juice through a fine mesh strainer to remove any solids that might have snuck through.

    Grenadine syrup ingredients in saucepan.

    Step 3. Dissolve sugar. Add the pomegranate juice and sugar to a small saucepan over medium heat. Stir until sugar is dissolved. Don't let it come to a boil.

    Homemade grenadine syrup in a spoon.

    Step 4. Cool. Let it cool, stir in the lemon juice and orange flower water. Your homemade grenadine syrup is now ready to use.

    Chef's Note: I usually don't add alcohol to my grenadine, but 1 tablespoon of vodka can extend the shelf life.

    Joss' Top Tip

    For the best flavor possible, make sure not to boil the syrup. Your goal is to dissolve the sugar but preserve the flavor.

    Ways to Use Grenadine

    As a cocktail syrup in alcoholic drinks: Some popular drinks that include grenadine are the El Presidente cocktail, Tequila Sunrise, Singapore Sling, Clover Club, the Mary Pickford, Malibu Sunset and the Hurricane.

    Non-alcoholic Drinks: While grenadine typically shows up in alcoholic drinks, you can add color and flavor to your favorite non-alcoholic beverages, such as mocktails and Shirley Temples. Mixing drinks for the kids on New Year's Eve makes them feel like they can celebrate with the adults.

    Food: You can also jazz up sweet foods with pomegranate flavor by adding grenadine to whipped cream, cakes and cupcakes, frosting, pancakes etc.

    Homemade Grenadine Syrup FAQs

    How do you store the finished syrup?

    Keep refrigerated in a covered jar or bottle for up to 1 month.

    Can I freeze grenadine syrup?

    You can freeze it for up to 1 year, but be sure to leave some space in the container because it will expand as it freezes.

    Is grenadine a cherry or pomegranate?

    Although grenadine might look like cherry juice, it's actually made from pomegranates. It comes from the French word, grenade, meaning pomegranate.

    What's the difference between grenadine and grenadine syrup?

    Grenadine is actually a type of syrup; 'grenadine' is just the more commonly used name for it.

    Homemade grenadine in a small glass jar with pomegranate arils around it.

    More Homemade Syrups You Will Love

    • Orgeat almond syrup in jar.
      Homemade Orgeat (Almond Syrup)
    • Pumpkin spice syrup in bottle with pumpkin pie spices in a spoon.
      Homemade Pumpkin Spice Coffee Syrup
    • Pure maple syrup in bottle.
      How To Make Pure Maple Syrup

    If you tried this Homemade Grenadine Syrup Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grenadine syrup pouring from spoon into small glass jar.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Homemade Grenadine Syrup

    Sweeten your drinks and more with this homemade grenadine syrup made with real pomegranates. Fresh pomegranates and lemon juice create a rich, vibrant flavor that completes your El Presidente or Tequila Sunrise. The syrup adds a bright red hue to your beverages--perfect for tropical vibes. Plus, you can throw this syrup together in 10 minutes or less.
    Course Condiment, Dessert
    Cuisine American, Middle Eastern
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 24 servings
    Calories 87kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Small saucepan
    • lemon squeezer
    • Fine mesh strainer

    Ingredients

    • 4 to 6 pomegranates will need enough to get 2 cups of juice
    • 1 ½ cups sugar
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • ¾ teaspoon orange flower water optional (or to taste)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Cut the pomegranates into quarters or even eighths if they are large.
      4 to 6 pomegranates
    • Using an orange/lemon squeezer, squeeze the juice out of the pomegranates. You will need 2 cups of juice.
    • Strain the juice through a fine mesh strainer to remove any solids that might have gotten through.
    • Add the pomegranate juice and sugar to a small saucepan over medium heat. Stir until sugar is dissolved, about 5 minutes. Don't let it come to a boil.
      1 ½ cups sugar
    • Let it cool. Stir in the lemon juice and the orange flower water, if using. It's now ready to use.
      1 tablespoon lemon juice, ¾ teaspoon orange flower water

    Notes

    • Pomegranate juice cheat: Alternatively, you can buy 2 cups pomegranate juice (such as POM) instead of juicing your own pomegranates to cut down on prep time. Make sure you buy 100% pomegranate juice.
    • Yield: This recipe yields about 3 cups grenadine. The serving size for the nutrition information is approximately 2 tablespoons.
    • Storage: Keep refrigerated in a covered jar or bottle for up to 1 month. You can freeze it for up to 1 year, but be sure to leave some space in the container because it will expand as it freezes.
    • Ways to use it in alcoholic drinks: Some popular drinks that include grenadine are the El Presidente cocktail, Tequila Sunrise, Singapore Sling, Clover Club, the Mary Pickford, Malibu Sunset and the Hurricane.
    • Ways to use it in non-alcoholic drinks: While grenadine typically shows up in alcoholic drinks, you can add color and flavor to your favorite non-alcoholic beverages, such as mocktails and Shirley Temples. Mixing drinks for the kids on New Year's Eve makes them feel like they can celebrate with the adults.
    • Ways to use it in food: You can also jazz up sweet foods with pomegranate flavor by adding it to whipped cream, cakes and cupcakes, frosting, pancakes etc.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 87kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 112mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 0.04IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Smoky Maple Burger Sauce

    June 28, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Slather your burgers with this homemade, smoky maple burger sauce. The maple syrup adds sweetness to the spicy mustard and bold hickory smoke in a creamy base, pairing perfectly with grilled beef burgers, pulled pork and more. This 4-ingredient sauce takes only minutes to prepare, so keep this recipe in mind when you host your next barbecue.

    Burger sauce in a bottle on cutting board with hamburger and spoon.

    I came up with the idea for this recipe when experimenting with liquid smoke and it's become my new, favorite summer condiment.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Smoky maple burger sauce ingredients prepped and labeled.

    This recipe uses 4 simple ingredients:

    Mayonnaise. The thicker the better.

    Liquid Smoke. To make liquid smoke, manufacturers condense and distill the smoke and steam from a fire into a concentrate.

    This liquid infuses your ingredients with the same smoky flavor that you'd get from a smoker or barbecue grill. Concentrates have intense flavors, so add small amounts--you'll probably need less than you think. You can get it online here.

    Maple Syrup. Artificial syrup usually comes from high-fructose corn syrup with added flavorings. If you want the full experience with this smoky sauce, it is best to pick up a bottle of real maple syrup made from tree sap.

    This syrup comes in light and dark varieties with different tastes. Light syrup will have a more mild flavor whereas amber and dark syrup will have a more pronounced maple flavor. Amber is the type you'll typically find in the grocery store. I suggest using either amber or dark syrup for this recipe so that the classic maple flavor comes through.

    Whole Grain Dijon Mustard. Whole grain Dijon has a 50/50 mixture of yellow mustard seeds (more mild in flavor) and brown mustard seeds (more sharp in flavor). It adds a nice hit of flavor to the sauce.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Smoky maple burger sauce ingredients in brown bowl.

    Step 1. Add all of the ingredients to a small bowl.

    Whisk in bowl of smoky maple burger sauce.

    Step 2. Whisk the mixture until smooth and combined.

    Burger sauce in a bottle with hamburger and spoon.

    Step 3. Transfer to a squeeze bottle or glass jar. Use this sauce to top burgers or as a dip for yam fries, etc.

    Top Tip

    Guar gum getting sprinkled into bowl of smoky maple burger sauce with whisk.

    I always use the same brand of mayo, but sometimes the consistency is a little thinner than normal, making the sauce liquidy. My secret ingredient to thicken it up is guar gum. I only use it if the sauce is too runny.

    All you have to do is sprinkle ¼ teaspoon of the guar gum into the finished sauce while whisking, until it thickens. Once it's been chilled in the fridge, it thickens up more. Do not use more than called for because it will turn out, well, gummy.

    Serving Suggestions

    Once you've made your sauce, you can douse it on your typical BBQ mains and sides: burgers (such as bison burgers, beef, chicken, turkey, vegetarian black bean etc.), steaks, hot dogs, ribs, potato fries, yam fries and grilled bread.

    It even tastes great on Cajun fries (check out how to make Cajun French fries).

    I usually break out this sauce for barbecues, but you can experiment with sit-down dishes, such as slow-cooker pulled pork burgers and saucy meatballs.

    Storage

    Store your finished sauce in a bottle or jar in the refrigerator for up to 2 months.

    Burger sauce in a tall, labeled bottle with hamburger on the side and white flowers in the background.

    ❤️More Sauce Recipes You Will Love

    • Xo sauce in a jar.
      Easy XO Sauce Recipe
    • Tomatillo hot sauce in a small wooden bowl.
      Fast and Easy Tomatillo Hot Sauce
    • White BBQ sauce dripping from spoon.
      White BBQ Sauce
    • Chipotle sauce pouring from blender into jar.
      How to Make Chipotle Sauce

    If you tried this Smoky Maple Burger Sauce Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Smoky maple burger sauce in glass bottle with a burger and spoon full of sauce on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Smoky Maple Burger Sauce

    Slather your burgers with this homemade, smoky maple burger sauce! The maple syrup adds sweetness to the spicy mustard and bold hickory smoke in a creamy, mayo base.
    Course Condiment
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 205kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup mayonnaise
    • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
    • 2 teaspoons whole grain dijon mustard
    • 2 teaspoons liquid hickory smoke
    • ¼ teaspoon guar gum optional
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a small bowl or measuring cup, whisk the mayo, maple syrup, dijon mustard and liquid smoke together until combined.
    • Transfer to a squeeze bottle or glass jar. Use this sauce to top burgers or as a dip for yam fries etc.
    • To Thicken the Sauce (Optional): If you would like a thicker burger sauce, follow this step. Slowly sprinkle the guar gum into the sauce while whisking. Continue to whisk until it thickens. It will become more thick once refrigerated.

    Notes

    • Store covered in the refrigerator for up to two months.
    • I only use the guar gum if the sauce turns out thin. This will depend on the mayo. Don't add more than called for or it will turn out gummy.
    • Once you've made your sauce, you can douse it on your typical BBQ mains and sides: burgers (such as bison burgers, beef, chicken, turkey, vegetarian black bean etc.), steaks, hot dogs, ribs, potato fries, yam fries and grilled bread.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 13g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 195mg | Potassium: 19mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 19IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Grilled Pineapple Juice

    June 21, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This grilled pineapple juice is a uniquely sweet and refreshing drink to have during hot days or to serve at backyard barbecues and other summer gatherings. It's sweet, smoky and delicious!

    Grilled pineapple juice and wedge in glass.

    You can add another layer of flavor to piña coladas or your favorite pineapple juice cocktails. The best part is, after grilling the pineapple, it only takes a few ingredients to blend it all together without the need for a juicer.

    I prefer to drink grilled pineapple juice over plain pineapple juice for its intensified flavor. I also have these fresh, fruity drinks you might like to enjoy this summer: homemade strawberry juice and a tutorial for how to make fresh lemonade.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Grilled Pineapple Juice Ingredients

    Grilled pineapple juice ingredients labeled on wooden background.
    • ripe pineapple - The pineapple will be peeled and sliced before grilling. If you have a pineapple corer, that will help bring some of the prep time down.
    • water - Not pictured. To make the juice.
    • limes - For freshly squeezed lime juice.
    • fresh ginger - Optional. I love the kick from the fresh ginger.
    • agave nectar - Or your preferred sweetener like white sugar or honey.
    • ice - For serving.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Pineapple slices on black board.

    Step 1. Cut the top and bottom off of the pineapple. Peel and slice the pineapple into rings.

    Grilled pineapple slices on outdoor grill.

    Step 2. Preheat the grill to medium heat. Place the pineapple rings on the grill. Grill until you see grill marks on both sides and the pineapple is warm and soft, about 10 minutes per side.

    Grilled pineapple chunks on black board.

    Step 3. Let cool slightly and chop into pieces (discarding the hard core) until you get 2 cups of pineapple.

    Grilled pineapple juice ingredients in blender.

    Step 4. Place the chopped, grilled pineapple in a blender with the water, lime juice, ginger and sweetener. Blend until smooth.

    Chef's Note: Optionally, you can strain it through a fine mesh strainer at this point, but I prefer it with the pulp.

    Grilled pineapple juice and wedge in stemless wine glass.

    Step 5. Serve in glasses over ice with a grilled pineapple wedge garnish!

    How to Use a Pineapple Corer

    A pineapple corer actually peels, cores and slices a whole pineapple in minutes. I love using it!

    Pineapple with top cut off.

    Step 1. Cut the top of the pineapple off.

    Pineapple with corer in the center.

    Step 2. Insert the pineapple corer into the middle of the pineapple. The blade should be in place over the hard core. Twist the handle until you reach the bottom of the pineapple.

    Pineapple corer pulling rings out of a pineapple.

    Step 3. Pull the corer out of the pineapple rind.

    Pineapple corer with pineapple rings and empty pineapple rind.

    Chef's Note: There is usually some juice left, which I love to drink straight out of the pineapple rind.

    Cored and skinned, pineapple rings on black board.

    Step 4. Press the buttons on the handle to release it from the blade and pull the rings off. That's it! This will create thinner slices so the grilling time may vary.

    Joss' Tips

    Grilled pineapple garnishes on black board.
    • If desired, you can reserve one ½" thick pineapple ring with the skin on, grill it and cut into wedges for a stunning drink garnish! You can cut a slit halfway into the middle of the wedge so that you can rest it on the rim of the glass.
    • Don't add ice until serving or you will water down the drink. Alternatively, you can chill it in the fridge for a couple of hours and serve it with no ice.

    What to do With Leftover Juice

    • Freeze: If you have any leftover juice, and you won't be able to finish it in a few days, I recommend freezing the juice. While you can freeze it in a glass or plastic container for up to 1 year, be sure to leave ½ inch of air space on top because as it freezes, it expands.
    • Ice cube trays: Another cool idea is to pour the juice into ice cube trays and freeze so that you can add them to sparkling water or blend them into smoothies and other drinks like piña coladas.
    • Refrigerate: Alternatively, you can store it in the fridge for up to 2 to 3 days.
    • Make Piña Coladas: If you are making piña coladas with this juice, I don't recommend adding the ginger. That might throw off the classic flavor of the drink.
    • Leftover grilled pineapple: Any remaining grilled pineapple slices that you don't use for the juice can be refrigerated and saved as a snack for up to 3 days.

    Recipe FAQs

    What does grilled pineapple juice taste like?

    What does grilling do to the pineapple's taste? Grilling food in general adds a smokiness. I compared grilled pineapple juice to plain pineapple juice side by side with a taste test.

    With the grilled pineapples, the charred bits added a subtle, smokey undertone to the sour and sweet juices. Speaking of sweet, with the added heat, it caramelized the sugars, resulting in the pineapple rings having a deeper sweetness and flavor. They were also a bit darker in color and more tender for blending.

    Does pineapple need to be ripe to grill?

    Yes. For best flavor, make sure the pineapple is ripe before grilling.

    Grilled pineapple juice and wedge in glass with fresh ginger root on the side.

    More Cool Drinks for Summer

    • Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
      Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail
    • Fruit infused water with berries in glass pitcher.
      How to Make Fruit-Infused Water
    • Mango ginger cocktail in glass with mango skewer, lime slice and straw.
      Mango Ginger Cocktail
    • Shirley temple in glass and dispenser with maraschino cherries and orange wedges.
      Shirley Temple Punch

    If you tried this 🍍 Grilled Pineapple Juice Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grilled pineapple juice in stemless wine glass with grilled pineapple wedge garnish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Grilled Pineapple Juice

    This grilled pineapple juice is a uniquely sweet and refreshing drink to have during hot days or to serve at backyard barbecues and other summer gatherings. You can add another layer of flavor to piña coladas or your favorite pineapple juice cocktails or drink it as is.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American, Latin American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 139kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill
    • Blender

    Ingredients

    • 1 large ripe pineapple peeled and sliced into rings about ¾" thick
    • 2 cups water
    • 2 teaspoons fresh ginger grated (optional)
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 tablespoons sugar or agave nectar or to taste
    • ice for serving
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the grill to medium heat. Place the pineapple rings on the grill. Grill until you see grill marks on both sides and the pineapple is warm and soft, about 10 minutes per side.
    • Let cool slightly and chop into pieces (discarding the hard core) until you get 2 cups of pineapple.
    • Place the chopped, grilled pineapple in a blender with the water, lime juice, ginger and sweetener. Blend until smooth. (Optionally, you can strain it through a fine mesh strainer, but I prefer it with the pulp.)
    • Serve in glasses over ice with a grilled pineapple wedge garnish!

    Notes

    • You can reserve one ½" thick pineapple ring with the skin on, grill it and cut into wedges for a stunning drink garnish!
    • Leftover juice can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 2 to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 1 year.
    • A pineapple slicer/corer would be very helpful for this recipe if you have one on hand. Instructions to use it are in the post.
    • Don't add ice until serving or you will water down the drink. Alternatively, you can chill it in the fridge for a couple of hours and serve it with no ice.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 260mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 28g | Vitamin A: 135IU | Vitamin C: 110mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

    Baked Bison Sliders

    June 14, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    These oven-baked, snack-size bison sliders pack a punch with their delicious fillings, condiments and buttery topping. They are absolute flavor bombs! I hope you enjoy this appetizer as much as my family and I do.

    Oven-baked bison meatball sliders in white casserole dish.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Details on These Bison Sliders

    Feeds a crowd. If you're in charge of feeding a crowd this Canada Day, this exotic Canadian meat dish of mini bison burgers will fit right into the menu along with my red and white themed Canada Day cheesecake in a jar.

    Baked, not fried. Unlike other bison meatball sliders that are pan fried, these ones are baked, taking away some active time to enjoy these tiny sandwiches and adding more time for guests.

    Not so greasy. The original sliders were called "sliders with a lid" because they were so greasy that they slid on the bun easily. Now, these bison sliders are not as greasy, especially since they are made with bison, but their miniature size will make it easy for them to slide into your mouth.

    I also have these pulled pork sliders that are equally delicious!

    Ingredients

    Baked bison sliders ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • ground bison - Ground bison can be found at farmers' markets, specialty meat shops, organic markets and grocery stores.
    • blue cheese - Pre-crumbled or you can crumble your own.
    • red onion - You can substitute with yellow or white onion if desired.
    • pickled jalapeños - These are optional but they provide a bit of kick to the sliders.
    • eggs - To bind the meatball ingredients.
    • slider buns - Brioche, whole wheat, sesame seed etc.
    • mozzarella cheese - Its mild flavor and melting properties are perfect for these sliders.
    • prepared horseradish - You can actually find wild horseradish in the same areas that the bison roam. You can also grow your own and use the root to make prepared horseradish. However, store-bought is what I use for this recipe.
    • Worcestershire sauce - Enhances the savory, meat flavor.
    • poppy seeds - The small seeds in the topping sauce add a nice, crunchy texture contrast to the soft, fluffy buns.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: These aren't too spicy for my kids to enjoy. But if your kids are sensitive to heat, make them whole-family friendly by omitting the jalapeños and using their favorite sauce instead of the horseradish sauce.

    How to Make Bison Sliders

    This recipe makes 12 sliders which is perfect for the whole family to enjoy or to serve at a dinner party or gathering!

    Bison sliders steps collage, making the meatballs.

    Step 1. Make the meat mixture. Preheat oven to 350˚F. In a large bowl combine the ground bison, garlic, blue cheese, onions, jalapeños, egg, salt and pepper (Images 1 and 2).

    Step 2. Roll into meatballs. Roll the mixture into 12 meatballs and place them on a baking sheet (Images 3 and 4).

    👩🏻‍🍳Check out more of my bison recipes and if you like meatballs, you might also like my Freezer meal turkey meatballs.

    Bison sliders steps collage, baking the meatballs and cutting open the buns.

    Step 3. Bake meatballs. Bake for 30 minutes in the preheated oven, or until they reach an internal temperature of 160°F (Image 5).

    Step 4. Make the slider sauce. Meanwhile, mix all of the slider sauce ingredients together and reserve (Image 6).

    Step 5. Prep the buns. Slice the slider buns in half (Image 7). Place the bottom half in a 9" x 13" baking dish. Spoon a little sauce on each bun (Image 8).

    Bison sliders steps collage, assembling the sliders.

    Step 6. Assemble the sliders. Top the buns with a meatball and another spoonful of sauce (Image 9). Sprinkle the mozzarella cheese on top (Image 10).

    Step 7. Make the topping. Combine the butter topping ingredients together (Image 11). Place the remaining half of the buns on top of the meatballs and lightly brush them with the butter topping (Image 12).

    Bison meatball sliders with melted mozzarella in casserole dish.

    Step 8. Bake. Transfer the bison sliders to the oven and bake for 15 minutes, until golden and the cheese is melted. Let cool for a few minutes and serve!

    Make-Ahead Preparations

    • The sauce and butter topping can be prepared a day or two ahead of time.
    • For the topping, just re-melt it before brushing it onto the sliders.
    • Store the slider buns in the freezer and pull them out on the day of serving to thaw so that they stay fresh.
    • The meatballs can be prepared and stored in the refrigerator, up to one day in advance, before baking.

    Serving Suggestions

    With all the spicy ingredients, I recommend a cool, sweet drink to pair with these sliders. One of the classic pairings of burgers and sliders are milkshakes.

    If you want a healthier option, I recommend a virgin daiquiri or fruit smoothie. Strawberry is a classic but you can also go with my mango-pineapple smoothie or blackberry smoothie.

    Everyone knows fries go with burgers like peanut butter and jelly (check out these Cajun fries), but if you want to try different sides, potato salad is a great option. You can also enjoy some potato chips, a simple green salad or grilled mango.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you keep sliders from getting soggy?

    Oven-baking sliders helps to avoid getting them soggy. After cooking the meat, make sure you drain the grease before building the sliders. When it comes to reheating, use an oven rather than a microwave to retain their crispiness.

    How long can you store leftovers in the fridge?

    Leftovers can be stored in the fridge in a covered container for up to 3 to 4 days.

    How do you reheat them?

    You can reheat the cooked bison sliders in a 325°F to 350°F oven, covered in foil, until heated through (about 10 to 12 minutes).

    Can you freeze them?

    Yes. They can be wrapped and frozen in a freezer bag (or in a covered casserole dish) for up to 2 months. Make sure to label with the date. Thaw in the fridge overnight and proceed to reheat in the oven.

    Bison sliders with melted cheese in casserole dish.

    More Delicious Bison Recipes

    • Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan.
      Bison Brisket Nachos
    • Bison chili with toppings in cast iron dish.
      Slow Cooker Bison Chili
    • BBQ bison short ribs on plate.
      Bison Short Ribs
    • Bison bone broth in large pot.
      Bison Bone Broth

    If you tried this Baked Bison Sliders Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Baked bison sliders in white casserole dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Baked Bison Sliders

    These oven-baked, snack-size bison sliders pack a punch with their delicious fillings, condiments and buttery topping. They are absolute flavor bombs!
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 12 sliders
    Calories 444kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Sliders

    • 1 ½ pounds ground bison
    • 2 teaspoons garlic minced
    • ½ cup blue cheese crumbles
    • ¼ cup red onion diced
    • 2 tablespoons pickled jalapeños diced
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon pepper
    • 12 slider buns brioche, sesame, whole wheat etc.
    • 2 cups mozzarella cheese shredded

    For the Sauce

    • 1 cup mayonnaise
    • 1 ½ tablespoons prepared horseradish
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

    For the Butter Topping

    • 2 tablespoons butter melted
    • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • ¼ teaspoon poppy seeds
    • ¼ teaspoon sugar
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350˚F.
    • In a large bowl, combine the ground bison, garlic, blue cheese, onions, jalapeños, egg, salt and pepper. Roll the mixture into 12 meatballs and place them on a baking sheet.
    • Bake for 30 minutes in the preheated oven, or until they reach an internal temperature of 160°F.
    • Meanwhile, mix all of the sauce ingredients together and reserve.
    • Slice the slider buns in half. Place the bottom half in a 9" x 13" baking dish.
    • Spoon a little sauce on each bun. Top with a meatball and another spoonful of sauce. Sprinkle the mozzarella cheese on top.
    • Combine the butter topping ingredients together. Place the remaining half of the buns on top of the meatballs and lightly brush them with the butter topping.
    • Transfer to the oven and bake for 15 minutes, until golden and the cheese is melted.
    • Let cool for a few minutes and serve!

    Notes

    • Make-ahead preparations:
      • The sauce and butter topping can be prepared a day or two ahead of time.
      • For the topping, just re-melt it before brushing it onto the sliders.
      • Store the slider buns in the freezer and pull them out on the day of serving to thaw so that they stay fresh.
      • The meatballs can be prepared and stored in the refrigerator, up to one day in advance, before baking.
    • Fridge storage: Leftovers can be stored in the fridge in a covered container for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Reheating leftovers: You can reheat them in a 325°F to 350°F oven, covered in foil, until heated through (about 10 to 12 minutes).
    • Freezer storage: They can be wrapped and frozen in a freezer bag (or in a casserole dish) for up to 2 months. Make sure to label with the date. Thaw in the fridge overnight and proceed to reheat in the oven.
    • To avoid a soggy slider:
      • Oven-baking sliders helps to avoid getting them soggy.
      • After cooking the meat, make sure you drain the grease before building the sliders.
      • When it comes to reheating, use an oven rather than a microwave to retain their crispiness.
    • Tweaks:
      • To tone down the spice, you can use pickles instead of jalapeños.
      • If blue cheese won't please everyone, try feta.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 444kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 592mg | Potassium: 232mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 291IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 3mg

    Electric Skillet Berries and Cream

    June 7, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Enjoy a light, refreshing dessert with this electric skillet baked berries and cream. Fresh berries line the bottom, giving your guests a surprise when they scoop up the sweet cream layer.

    Berries and cream in ramekins with fresh mint.

    The topping consists of crunchy graham cracker crumbles and more fresh berries, almost like the layers of a strawberry crumble pie. This dessert is easy and quick to assemble and it doesn't require many ingredients.

    Creamy desserts offer a lighter alternative to heavy treats, such as chocolate cake and brownies. If you're having a full meal, this recipe pairs well with dishes such as salads, pasta, blackened chicken and skillet fried fish. You can also serve berries and cream by itself for brunch with this morning punch (aka mimosas).

    You can also bake these delicious treats in an electric skillet: electric skillet brownies, electric skillet cake and electric skillet pie.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • crème fraiche - can be substituted with sour cream (see note below)
    • heavy cream - heavy cream has a milk fat of at least 36% and can also be called heavy whipping cream
    • sugar - I use white granulated sugar
    • fresh mixed berries - choose your favorite or whatever is on sale
    • brown sugar - for the topping
    • graham crackers - a sweet, crisp cracker made from graham flour
    • fresh mint leaves - as a garnish

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    Chef's Note: While sour cream and crème fraiche taste similar and are made the same way, crème fraiche has more fat and less water, creating a richer, thicker ingredient. Crème fraiche works better in higher-heat dishes because it doesn't curdle like sour cream. It has a milder tanginess compared to sour cream which balances out the fruit in this dessert.

    Berry Options

    Popular choices include blueberries, blackberries, strawberries and raspberries, but you can experiment with diced kiwi, mango, cubed cantaloupe or pineapple if you prefer.

    Or, get even more adventurous and try some exotic fruits such as pomegranate seeds and lychees. Pomegranate seeds are amazing in my pomegranate mojito mocktail but would also work beautifully in this dessert.

    Tools

    Besides an electric skillet, you will also need: 4 small ramekins (7 oz. or 8 oz.) and a small baking rack that fits inside of your electric skillet.

    Check out my reviews for the best ceramic electric skillet and best stainless steel electric skillet if you don't have this great appliance yet.

    How to Make it

    1. Preheat electric skillet to 400ºF.
    2. In a medium bowl, whisk crème fraiche, heavy cream, white sugar and vanilla together until well combined.
    3. Distribute 2 cups berries into 4 small ramekins. Cover each with the cream mixture evenly. Sprinkle each with 1 tablespoon of brown sugar.
    4. Place a small baking rack inside the electric skillet. Place the ramekin molds on top of the rack. Cover and cook for 25 minutes.
    5. Cool for a few minutes. Sprinkle with the crumbled cookies, mint leaves and more fresh berries right before serving.
    Berries and cream in a ramekin with fresh mint and crumbled cookie.

    Storage Tips

    • Cream doesn't last long at room temperature, so stash leftovers in the fridge as soon as possible.
    • While this dessert is best consumed immediately, you can cover the ramekins with plastic wrap to keep the dessert fresh in the fridge for another 1 to 2 days.
    Electric skillet berries and cream dessert in small ramekins.

    More Summer Desserts You Will Love

    • Papaya cream with cassis in wine glass.
      Papaya Cream
    • Bananas Foster on black plate with ice cream.
      Easy Bananas Foster (Flambéed Bananas)
    • Peach cobbler in electric skillet.
      Electric Skillet Peach Cobbler
    • Electric Skillet Oatmeal Cookies in a clear jar, on white wooden background.
      Electric Skillet Oatmeal Cookies

    If you tried this 🍓 Electric Skillet Berries and Cream Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Berries and cream in a ramekin.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Electric Skillet Berries and Cream

    Enjoy a light, refreshing dessert with this electric skillet baked berries and cream. Small ramekins are layered with berries, cream, brown sugar and cookie crumbles.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 394kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 4 small ramekins (7 or 8 oz.)
    • Small baking rack

    Ingredients

    • ¾ cup crème fraiche
    • ¾ cup heavy cream
    • 2 tablespoons white sugar
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 cups fresh mixed berries cleaned (plus more to garnish)
    • 4 tablespoons brown sugar
    • ½ cup graham crackers crumbled
    • fresh mint leaves to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat electric skillet to 400ºF.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk the crème fraiche, heavy cream, white sugar and vanilla together until well combined.
      ¾ cup crème fraiche, ¾ cup heavy cream, 2 tablespoons white sugar, ½ teaspoon vanilla
    • Distribute 2 cups berries into 4 small ramekins. Cover each with the cream mixture evenly. Sprinkle each with 1 tablespoon of brown sugar.
      2 cups fresh mixed berries, 4 tablespoons brown sugar
    • Place a small baking rack inside the electric skillet. Place the ramekin molds on top of the rack. Cover and cook for 25 minutes.
    • Cool for a few minutes. Sprinkle with the crumbled cookies, mint leaves and more fresh berries right before serving.
      ½ cup graham crackers

    Notes

    1. The crème fraiche can be substituted with sour cream.
    2. Cream doesn't last long at room temperature, so stash leftovers in the fridge as soon as possible.
    3. While this dessert is best consumed immediately, you can cover the ramekins with plastic wrap to keep the dessert fresh in the fridge for another 1 to 2 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 394kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 76mg | Sodium: 104mg | Potassium: 175mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 30g | Vitamin A: 960IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 98mg | Iron: 1mg

    Grenadine Whipped Cream

    May 31, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Garnish your favorite desserts and drinks with this grenadine whipped cream. The grenadine gives your whipped cream a bright, reddish hue and sweet flavor that makes it perfect for colorful dishes. In as little as a few minutes, you can use it to top hot and cold drinks, cakes, pies, cupcakes, brownies, fruit, homemade strawberry shortcake ice cream and much more.

    Grenadine whipped cream in glass jar with fresh strawberries and a piping bag on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥘Ingredients

    Grenadine whipped cream ingredients prepped and labeled on grey background.
    • heavy whipping cream - Heavy cream for whipping has between 36 - 40 percent milk fat.
    • powdered sugar - Also called icing sugar, powdered sugar has many jobs to do in this recipe. It is used to sweeten, thicken and stabilize the whipped cream.
    • grenadine syrup - You could simply dye your whipped cream with food coloring, but grenadine adds a sweet, fruity and unique flavor to the lightness of the cream.

    Homemade grenadine. If you want to make real grenadine syrup at home, all you need is sugar and pomegranate juice, although some manufacturers use blackcurrant and other fruit juices. When you're done, you'll have a handy ingredient for desserts and your favorite beverages.

    Commercial grenadine. You can buy grenadine in grocery stores. Mass manufacturers often make grenadine from high fructose corn syrup with no actual fruit content.

    Your choice. Both versions can work in this recipe (the color will differ), but if you are looking for something with natural fruit flavor, check the ingredient list.

    🥣How to Make Grenadine Whipped Cream

    A bowl of heavy cream, icing sugar and grenadine and an electric hand mixer.

    Step 1. Add Ingredients to bowl & whip. Add the heavy cream, grenadine and powdered sugar to a large glass measuring cup or bowl. Whip the cream mixture using an electric hand mixer on a low speed until it begins to thicken.

    A bowl of grenadine whipped cream with beaters and fresh strawberries on the side.

    Step 2. Continue whipping. Higher the speed and continue whipping until stiff peaks form.

    Metal whisk attachment with whipped cream on it.

    Chef's Note: Be careful not to over-whip the cream! The cream will end up separating if you go too far.

    Grenadine whipped cream in a jar with fresh strawberries.

    Step 3. Serve. The grenadine whipped cream is now ready to use!

    🍰Serving Suggestions

    • Whipped cream usually appears on desserts, but you can garnish sweet alcoholic drinks with a dollop of whipped cream, fruit slices and fruit salad.
    • You can also brighten non-alcoholic drinks such as Italian sodas, fruit smoothies (like my blackberry smoothie bowl) and milkshakes.
    • Use it as a dip for your favorite fruits.

    💭Top Tip

    Make sure the cream is nice and chilled before whipping. You can also chill the whisk attachments and bowl for best results. This keeps the fat in whipping cream cold, which in turn results in light and fluffy whipped cream.

    ❓Recipe FAQs

    How long does grenadine whipped cream last in the fridge?

    Whipped cream needs to be stored covered in the refrigerator. It is best used within one day to retain its stiff peaks, however, it can last up to one week.

    Is grenadine a pomegranate or cherry?

    While many people believe that grenadine is made from cherries (possibly because the Shirley Temple drink combines grenadine and maraschino cherries and the juices look similar) it is actually made with pomegranates.

    Pink grenadine whipped cream in glass jar with fresh strawberries.

    ❤️More Delicious Homemade Desserts

    • Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
      Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae
    • Peach tarte tatin on marble/wooden serving board.
      Peach Tarte Tatin (Video)
    • Black Forest cake balls stacked on plate.
      Black Forest Cake Balls
    • Cherry galette dusted with icing sugar.
      Cherry Galette

    If you tried this Grenadine Whipped Cream Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grenadine whipped cream in bowl with electric mixer.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Grenadine Whipped Cream

    You can use this homemade grenadine whipped cream to top hot and cold drinks, cakes, pies, cupcakes, brownies, fruit, ice cream and much more.
    Course Condiment, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 129kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric hand mixer

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup heavy whipping cream
    • 3 tablespoons grenadine syrup
    • 2 tablespoons powdered sugar
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the heavy cream, grenadine and powdered sugar to a large glass measuring cup or bowl.
    • Whip the cream mixture using an electric hand mixer on a low speed until it begins to thicken.
    • Higher the speed and continue whipping until stiff peaks form.
    • Keep chilled in the refrigerator. It is best used within 1 day.

    Notes

    • This recipe makes about 2 cups whipped topping.
    • Nutrition information is per ¼ cup whipped topping, approximately.
    • It can be stored in the fridge for 3 or 4 days, but it is best if used within 1 day.
    • Make sure the cream is nice and chilled before whipping. You can also chill the whisk attachments and bowl for best results.
    • Be careful not to over-beat the cream! The cream will end up separating if you go too far.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 129kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 10mg | Potassium: 30mg | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 437IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 0.04mg

    Fog Cutter Cocktail

    May 24, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This vintage Fog Cutter cocktail may be simple to make, but it is layered with flavors, starting with the dark sherry on top to the bright citrus juices on the bottom.

    Fog Cutter cocktail in tall glasses with fresh mint.

    It packs a punch with its variety of hard liquors, so it's best to take sips and enjoy the complex flavor. I recommend serving this tiki beverage while relaxing on the backyard patio on a sunny day.

    I had fun testing this recipe with my mom, although she would prefer to add some club soda. We also tested this mojito mocktail recipe that tastes just as refreshing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Fog cutter cocktail ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • white rum - a classic spirit for fruity cocktails
    • gin - the taste of gin has a hint of citrus making it a great addition to this citrusy drink
    • brandy - brandy is distilled wine
    • orange and lemon juices - freshly squeezed
    • orgeat syrup - an almond-flavored sweetener
    • sherry - fortified wine made from white grapes

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Sweetener Substitutions

    The orgeat is a unique ingredient because it is not a fruit or liquor; orgeat is an almond syrup, giving the cocktail sweetness with a subtle nuttiness.

    If you can't find it in the grocery store, some of the best substitutions would be almond extract sweetened with simple syrup or amaretto liqueur (these would be the best options to keep the nuttiness).

    Fog Cutter Mug

    This drink traditionally comes in a fog cutter mug. It is a ceramic mug created by the same person who created the drink, Victor "Trader Vic" Bergeron, in the early 1940s.

    The mug is painted with images of hula girls, tropical fruit, or a tiki, hence why it is considered a tiki mug. It comes in different designs but is usually tall, thin and narrows in the center.

    An exotic cocktail in a tiki glass stands on a wooden bar counter in a pub or restaurant.

    Credit: Photo by depositphotos.com

    The only disadvantage to this mug is not being able to see the colorful drink, so a Collins glass or highball glass will work just as well.

    How to Make a Fog Cutter Cocktail

    Fog cutter in cocktail shaker with ice.

    Step 1. Build the drink. Fill a cocktail glass with ice. Pour the white rum, gin, brandy, orange juice, lemon juice and orgeat syrup over the ice and stir well.

    Sherry floating over spoon into fog cutter drink.

    Step 2. Float the sherry. Float the sherry on top by slowly pouring it over an upside down spoon into the drink.

    Chef's Note: If you have a cocktail shaker, feel free to use it. Otherwise, simply add the ingredients straight to the glass filled with ice.

    Fog Cutter cocktail in tall glasses with fresh mint and wooden stirrers.

    Step 3. Serve. Garnish the Fog Cutter drink with the mint sprig and serve immediately.

    Top Tip

    Keep your glassware in the freezer for at least 30 minutes beforehand to keep the cocktail chilled for longer!

    Food Pairings

    Since this is a tropical tiki cocktail, it would be great paired with Hawaiian or Caribbean finger food. One of the most popular finger foods in these regions is shrimp. What makes shrimp great is each region has a distinct flavor and texture for more options:

    • Hawaiian shrimp recipes traditionally keep the shell on, giving them more flavor and crunch.
    • Caribbean shrimp dishes are often marinated in ingredients like tangy lime juice and rum.
    • Grilled shrimp. If you prefer some Argentinian flavors, check out my grilled jumbo shrimp served with a chimichurri sauce.
    • Thai soup. Try it with this hot and sour Tom Yum shrimp soup.
    • Savory finger food. If you do not like seafood, other savory finger foods like pineapple meatballs or sausage rolls will help counter the sweet and tart drink with their saltiness.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why is sherry floated on top of the Fog Cutter?

    This technique is used for presentation of the drink and to add an aromatic layer that enhances the flavor experience.

    How do you prevent it from getting watered down?

    If you tend to nurse drinks, you might find that the ice eventually waters down the drink. You can add less ice but be sure to use a cocktail shaker to chill the drink before pouring it into a pre-chilled glass to help keep it cold.

    Fog Cutter cocktail in tall glasses with fresh mint, ice and wooden citrus-shaped stirrers.

    More Fruity Cocktails You Will Love

    • Strawberry slushy margarita with mint leaves.
      How to Make a Slushy Margarita
    • Spring white wine sangria in wine glass.
      Spring White Wine Sangria
    • Strawberry liqueur in jar with fresh strawberries on the side.
      Strawberry Liqueur
    • Mango ginger cocktail in glass with mango skewer, lime slice and straw.
      Mango Ginger Cocktail

    If you tried this Fog Cutter Cocktail Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Fog cutter cocktail in tall glasses.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Fog Cutter Cocktail

    This vintage Fog Cutter tiki drink is layered with flavors, starting with the dark sherry on top to the bright citrus juices on the bottom.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 245kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ ounces white rum 3 tablespoons
    • ½ ounce gin 1 tablespoon
    • ½ ounce brandy 1 tablespoon
    • 2 ounces orange juice 4 tablespoons, freshly squeezed
    • 1 ounce lemon juice 2 tablespoons, freshly squeezed
    • ½ ounce orgeat 1 tablespoon
    • ½ ounce sherry 1 tablespoon
    • ice crushed or cubes
    • 1 mint sprig to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Fill a cocktail glass with ice (a Collins glass works well or a tiki mug if you have).
    • Pour the white rum, gin, brandy, orange juice, lemon juice and orgeat syrup over the ice and stir well.
    • Float the sherry on top by slowly pouring it over an upside down spoon into the drink.
    • Garnish with the mint sprig and serve immediately.

    Notes

    • Orgeat is an almond-flavored simple syrup. If you can't find it in the grocery store or make it at home, some of the best substitutions would be almond extract with regular simple syrup or amaretto liqueur (these would be the best options to keep the nuttiness).
    • If you have a cocktail shaker, feel free to use it. Otherwise, simply add the ingredients straight to the glass filled with ice.
    • Keep your glassware in the freezer beforehand to keep the cocktail chilled for longer!
    • The Fog Cutter traditionally comes in a fog cutter mug. It is a ceramic mug created by the same person who created the drink, Victor "Trader Vic" Bergeron, in the early 1940s. The mug is painted with images of hula girls, tropical fruit, or a tiki, hence why it is considered a tiki mug. It comes in different designs but is usually tall, thin and narrows in the center.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 245kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 10mg | Potassium: 163mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 115IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 1mg

    Grilled Bison Ribeye Steaks

    May 17, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Throw these fresh bison steaks on the grill, and dazzle your guests with the juicy meat and bold seasonings. Sea salt, red pepper flakes and mustard seeds add a spicy kick to the flavor profile. These bison ribeyes will be a refreshing break from your typical beef steak dinner.

    Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on wooden serving board with spices on the side.

    If you're feeding a crowd, throw them on the grill along with these juicy bison burgers and add some zucchini pasta or kimchi carbonara to give your guests some options.

    These steaks would also taste great next to any one of these chanterelle mushroom recipes on the side.

    If you have any leftovers, the sliced steak strips taste amazing on these bison brisket nachos.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥩 Bison Steak vs. Beef Steak

    Bison steaks and beef steaks are both rich and hearty, but bison has a lighter, slightly sweeter flavor and a lower fat and calorie content. This makes it ideal for people who prefer leaner meat in their diet but still want that savory, meaty steak flavor similar to beef. Despite these differences, you can buy bison steaks in the same cuts as beef.

    🥘 Ingredients

    For the Bison Steaks

    Raw bison ribeye steaks labeled and steak spice in a bowl on cutting board.
    • boneless bison ribeye steaks - Plan for about eight ounces of steak per person so that everyone has enough. Ribeyes are nicely marbled and flavorful.
    • olive oil - Not pictured.
    • sea salt flakes - Will be used as a finishing salt.

    For the Steak Rub

    Steak spice ingredients for bison ribeyes labeled.

    This is basically a homemade Montreal steak spice consisting of:

    • mixed peppercorns
    • coriander seeds
    • dill seeds
    • red pepper flakes
    • sea salt
    • garlic powder
    • brown sugar (not pictured)
    • mustard seeds

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    ♨️ How to Grill Bison Steaks

    Fresh bison ribeye steak with steak rub.

    Step 1. Dry marinate the bison steaks. Brush the bison steaks on both sides with olive oil. Massage a generous amount of the combined rub ingredients onto both sides of the steaks. Marinate in the fridge for at least 1 hour or overnight.

    Seasoned, bison ribeye steaks on the outdoor grill.

    Step 2. Grill the steaks. You're going to place the steaks on an outdoor grill preheated to medium-high heat (about 400°F) and cook on both sides until desired temperature.

    Chef's Note: You shouldn't need to use all of the rub. There will be some leftover that you can store in a container in the cupboard.

    Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on wooden serving board.

    Step 3. Serve. First, you're going to let the bison steaks rest for 5-10 minutes on a cutting board, loosely covered in foil. This will give you a moist, juicy steak. Garnish with the sea salt flakes and serve!

    🌡️ Bison Steak Temperature

    Check your steak's internal temperature as you grill to ensure that it cooks perfectly to your liking.

    • If you prefer rare steak, grill your steak to 120°F-125°F
    • Medium-rare ranges from 130°F-135°F
    • Medium ranges from 140°F-145°F
    • Your steak is well done at 160°F-175°F

    💭 Joss' Top Tips

    • If you don't have a mortar and pestle or coffee grinder, there are other options to crush the full size spices. A kitchen mallet or rolling pin would work just fine or anything that is heavy enough--but be sure to do so on a cutting board.
    • Let the steaks sit at room temperature for 30 minutes before grilling to ensure more even cooking and a better sear.

    🥗 Serving Suggestions

    • Sides: You can serve your steaks with cold or hot side dishes, such as shucked & grilled corn on the cob, potato salad, creamy dill pickle pasta salad, hemp seed salad and quick kimchi slaw. Butter sautéed mushrooms are another classic steak side.
    • Drinks: For a non-alcoholic option, you can cool down from your sizzling steak with this summer blueberry mojito mocktail. As for beer, you can't go wrong with an India pale ale (IPA) for these grilled ribeyes.
    • Dessert: For dessert, complementary fruits include cherries, blueberries and blackberries so I recommend this sweet cherry galette or a brie and blackberry galette topped with ice cream!

    ❓ Bison Steak FAQs

    How do you store leftover, cooked bison steaks?

    Once you're done, transfer any leftover steaks to an airtight container, then store them in the fridge for three to four days.

    What to do with the leftovers?

    You can use the leftovers to make steak sandwiches or add the sliced meat over nachos (carne asada nachos style). Eat your leftovers quickly to preserve the texture, juiciness and flavor.

    Is bison steak chewy?

    Bison steak can become chewy if you overcook it so I recommend using a thermometer to get to the desired temperature.

    Why is my bison steak tough?

    To avoid a tough steak, I recommend cooking your steaks to no more than medium, which ranges from 140°F-145°F. A steak marinade also helps.

    Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on wooden serving board with steak spice in a small jar.

    💜 More Juicy Bison Recipes

    • Bison recipes collage.
      14 of Our Best Bison Recipes
    • Baked bison sliders in white casserole dish.
      Baked Bison Sliders
    • BBQ bison short ribs on plate.
      Bison Short Ribs
    • Sliced bison roast on white serving dish with vegetables.
      Slow Cooker Bison Roast

    If you tried this 🥩 Grilled Bison Steaks Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on cutting board with spices on the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Grilled Bison Ribeye Steaks

    Throw these fresh bison steaks on the grill, and dazzle your guests with the juicy meat and bold seasonings. These bison ribeyes will be a refreshing break from your typical beef steak dinner.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 273kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill
    • Mortar and pestle
    • Thermometer

    Ingredients

    For the Steak Rub

    • 2 tablespoons mixed peppercorns
    • 1 tablespoon coriander seeds
    • 1 tablespoon dill seeds
    • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
    • 2 tablespoons mustard seeds
    • 2 tablespoons sea salt
    • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
    • 1 tablespoon brown sugar

    For the Steak

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 4 boneless bison ribeye steaks about 8 ounces each
    • sea salt flakes to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • With a mortar and pestle or coffee grinder, crush the peppercorns, coriander seeds, dill seeds and red pepper flakes. Add the remaining steak rub ingredients and combine.
    • Brush the bison steaks on both sides with olive oil. Massage a generous amount of rub onto both sides of the steaks (you shouldn't need to use all of the rub). Marinate in the fridge for at least 1 hour or overnight.
    • Let the steaks sit at room temperature for 30 minutes before grilling. Preheat the outdoor grill to medium-high heat (about 400°F).
    • Place the steaks on the grill and cook until desired temperature, flipping once.
    • Remove the steaks to a cutting board, lightly cover with foil and rest for 5-10 minutes.
    • Garnish with sea salt flakes and serve!

    Notes

    • Check your steak's internal temperature as you grill to ensure that it cooks perfectly to your liking.
      • If you prefer rare steak, grill your steak to 120°F-125°F
      • Medium-rare ranges from 130°F-135°F
      • Medium ranges from 140°F-145°F
      • Your steak is well done at 160°F-175°F
    • Crushing the spices: If you don't have a mortar and pestle or coffee grinder, there are other options to crush the full size spices. A kitchen mallet or rolling pin would work just fine or anything that is heavy enough--but be sure to do so on a cutting board.
    • Storage: Once you're done, transfer any leftover steaks to an airtight container, then store them in the fridge for three to four days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 273kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 111mg | Sodium: 1836mg | Potassium: 706mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 94IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 6mg

    Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu

    May 10, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This electric skillet glazed tofu with snap peas is a tasty, weeknight vegetarian dinner. The sweet, sour and spicy flavor from the glaze really kicks the tofu up a notch! It only takes about 30 minutes total to prepare, which includes marinating time and only 10 minutes of actual cooking time in an electric skillet.

    Fried tofu with snap peas in bowl.

    This recipe is perfect for adding some meatless dinners into your week, or providing new inspiration for an already vegetarian household. It's vibrantly green, like my sweet pea purée, and full of delicious flavor, similar to my kimchi tofu stir fry.

    Paired with fresh sautéed vegetables and herbaceous cilantro, this meal cooks quickly and easily in an electric skillet making for a convenient dinner option.

    As with most electric frying pan recipes, this one is great for road trips in the RV as well.

    I also have a detailed tutorial for how to use an electric frying pan if you're interested and a post rating the best ceramic electric skillet if you don't have one yet.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Electric skillet glazed tofu ingredients labeled on wooden background.
    • rice vinegar - Rice vinegar has a mild, slightly sweet, and tangy flavor that helps balance the flavors in a stir fry.
    • honey - This recipe can easily be made vegan by substituting the honey in the marinade for agave nectar, maple syrup, or a little white sugar.
    • Sriracha sauce - Optional--for some heat.
    • extra firm tofu - Extra firm tofu holds up to stir frying well and I love the texture.
    • snap peas - Snap peas, also known as sugar snap peas, can be eaten whole, including the pod and the seeds inside! You can easily substitute with snow peas (pictured above); they work great too.
    • red cabbage - For nice, thin slices check out my tutorial for how to shred cabbage. Red is actually the same as purple cabbage, as explained in this purple cabbage recipes round-up.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    Chef's Note: The sauce for this pan-fried tofu is amazing but you might also want to check out my other tofu marinades.

    How to Make Electric Skillet Tofu

    Tofu cubes marinating in zip-top bag.

    Step 1. Marinate. Mix the marinade ingredeints in a small bowl. Add the cubed tofu to a zip-top bag, then add the sauce. Let as much air out of the bag as you can, seal it and massage gently to coat. Let it soak for around 10 minutes.

    Tofu cubes fried in electric skillet.

    Step 2. Fry tofu. Heat an electric skillet to 375ºF. Remove the tofu from the sauce and add 1 tablespoon sesame oil to the electric skillet. Fry the tofu until golden brown on each side. Remove and reserve.

    Chef's Note: For best results, pat the tofu dry with paper towel before cubing.

    Carrots, snap peas and red cabbage frying in electric skillet.

    Step 3. Fry vegetables. Heat another tablespoon of sesame oil in the skillet and stir fry the vegetables for 3-5 minutes, until crisp-tender.

    Fried tofu and snap peas in bowls with forks.

    Step 4. Serve the electric skillet tofu. Turn off the skillet heat. Add the reserved tofu and sauce. Mix well. Serve topped with cilantro. It can be served on its own or over rice or quinoa.

    💬 Once you're all finished, check out my handy tutorial for how to clean an electric skillet.

    Drink Pairings

    Spicy fried tofu pairs well with a variety of drinks that can complement its flavors. Here are some great options for you:

    • Cold Beer: A light, crisp beer like a lager or pilsner can cool down the spiciness and cleanse the palate. For a richer taste, an IPA with citrus or tropical notes can also work well.
    • Sparkling Water: The effervescence of sparkling water can help to cut through the spice and refresh your mouth between bites.
    • Iced Tea: Unsweetened iced tea, particularly green or black tea, can be a refreshing accompaniment that doesn't overpower the tofu's flavors. For a sweeter option, consider this iced peach green tea.
    • Milk or Plant-Based Milk: Dairy milk or creamy plant-based alternatives like coconut, oat, or pumpkin seed milk can help neutralize the heat from the spices.
    • Fruit Juice: Sweet and tangy juices like mango juice or grilled pineapple juice can balance the spiciness with their natural sugars and acidity.
    • Lemonade: The sweet and tart flavors of lemonade are a nice contrast to the spicy tofu. Check out my tutorial for how to make lemonade here.
    • Wine: A slightly sweet white wine like Riesling or Moscato can counteract the spiciness. A light, fruity red wine like a Beaujolais or Pinot Noir can also work.
    • Cocktails: Cocktails with a balance of sweetness and acidity, such as a mojito (or mojito mocktail), slushy margarita, or a cranberry Moscow mule, can complement the spice.

    What not to pair this dish with: Avoid overly strong or bitter drinks that might clash with the tofu's flavors.

    Storage Info

    It's best enjoyed immediately but leftovers can be stored in the refrigerator and reheated again for up to 4 to 5 days.

    Didn't find the answer you're looking for?

    Ask AI to answer based on this specific recipe:

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Fried tofu with snap peas, red cabbage and fresh cilantro in bowls.

    More Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes to Try

    • Cheesy scalloped potatoes in brown bowls on marble background.
      Electric Skillet Scalloped Potatoes
    • Risotto in bowl with asparagus and lemon zest.
      Electric Skillet Asparagus Risotto
    • English muffin sandwiches stacked on purple plate.
      Electric Skillet English Muffins
    • Electric Skillet Stuffed Puff Pastry Triangles

    If you tried this Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Glazed tofu with fresh herbs in bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu

    This electric skillet glazed tofu with sugar snap peas is an excellent weeknight vegetarian dinner. The sweet, sour and spicy flavor from the glaze really kicks the tofu up a notch!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 207kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 2 tablespoons rice vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons honey
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • ½ tablespoon ginger grated
    • 1 teaspoon Sriracha sauce
    • 2 cups extra firm tofu cubed
    • 2 tablespoons sesame oil divided
    • 2 cups snap peas or snow peas
    • 1 cup carrot shredded
    • ½ cup red cabbage shredded
    • fresh cilantro leaves to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Mix the rice vinegar, honey, soy sauce, ginger and Sriracha in a small bowl.
      2 tablespoons rice vinegar, 2 tablespoons honey, 2 tablespoons soy sauce, ½ tablespoon ginger, 1 teaspoon Sriracha sauce
    • Add the cubed tofu to a zip-top bag. Pour sauce mixture over tofu. Let as much air out of the bag as you can, seal it and massage gently to coat. Let it soak for around 10 minutes.
      2 cups extra firm tofu
    • Heat electric skillet to 375ºF.
    • Remove the tofu from the sauce (reserve the sauce). Add 1 tablespoon sesame oil to the electric skillet. Add the tofu and fry until golden brown on each side, about 6 minutes. Remove the tofu from the skillet and reserve.
    • Heat another tablespoon of sesame oil in the skillet and stir fry the vegetables for 3-5 minutes, until crisp-tender.
      2 cups snap peas, 1 cup carrot, ½ cup red cabbage
    • Turn off the skillet heat. Add the reserved tofu and sauce. Mix well.
    • Serve topped with cilantro and more sriracha, if desired. It can be served on its own or over rice or quinoa.

    Notes

    • Tip. For best results, pat the tofu dry with paper towel before cubing.
    • Make it Vegan. This recipe can easily be made vegan by substituting the honey in the marinade for agave nectar, maple syrup, or a little white sugar.
    • Leftover Storage. It's best enjoyed immediately but leftovers can be stored in the refrigerator and reheated again for up to 4 to 5 days.
    • Drink Pairing. Spicy fried tofu pairs well with a variety of drinks. Here are some great options for you:
      • Cold Beer: A light, crisp beer like a lager or pilsner can cool down the spiciness and cleanse the palate. For a richer taste, an IPA with citrus or tropical notes can also work well.
      • Wine: A slightly sweet white wine like Riesling or Moscato can counteract the spiciness. A light, fruity red wine like a Beaujolais or Pinot Noir can also work.
      • Cocktails: Cocktails with a balance of sweetness and acidity, such as a mojito (or mojito mocktail), slushy margarita, or a cranberry Moscow mule, can complement the spice.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 207kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 635mg | Potassium: 448mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 6004IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 3mg

    Mango Ginger Cocktail

    May 3, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This mango ginger cocktail has summer written all over it with its bright fruity flavors paired with dark rum and ginger for some bite. It is inspired by my grilled mango skewer recipe and can be garnished with the mini skewers for a summery cocktail that you and your guests will love.

    Mango cocktail with grilled mango skewer, straw and limes slices in a glass jar.

    After a long winter with loads of snow, this mango ginger was just what I needed to get me in the mood for hot, summer days!

    The recipe for this fun cocktail actually comes from the marinade for these grilled mango skewers, with a few tweaks. If you like the spicy bite you get from fresh ginger, you will love this drink!

    I also have these cocktails to help you cool off this summer: passion fruit mojito, frozen watermelon cocktail and tiki rum mai tai.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Mango Ginger Cocktail Ingredients

    Mango ginger cocktail ingredients on wooden board - labeled.
    • dark rum - Dark rum is aged in oak barrels for long periods. It has a deep, smoky flavor.
    • lime juice - Freshly squeezed.
    • agave nectar - I love the taste of agave nectar and it blends so well into drinks--just as well as a simple syrup, but it comes from the agave plant.
    • mango juice - 100% with no added sugar. Sometimes mango juice will actually be a blend of mango and other juices like apple and/or pear if you look at the ingredients list. That is okay because mango is the main flavor in it but try to find juice without added sugar.
    • fresh ginger - I love the bite of fresh ginger in this drink.
    • grilled mango mini skewer + lime wedge or slice - This is an optional garnish.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make it

    Glass filled with ice on board.

    Step 1. Fill with ice. Fill a cocktail glass with ice.

    Glass filled with mango ginger cocktail ingredients.

    Step 2. Add ingredients. Add the dark rum, lime juice, agave nectar, mango juice and ginger.

    Mango ginger cocktail getting stirred with bar spoon.

    Step 3. Stir. Stir until well combined.

    Mango ginger cocktail in ice-filled glass.

    Step 4. Serve. Add the garnishes and serve!

    Top Tip

    Keep the glasses and mango juice nice and chilled ahead of time for best results.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serving this drink with the marinated mango garnish and lime slices makes it perfect for summer-themed parties and backyard get-togethers.

    • I suggest pairing it with a main dish such as grilled kimchi chicken thighs, blackened chicken or halibut tacos.
    • Creamy potato or macaroni salad for a side.
    • If you only plan on serving appetizers, these carne asada (grilled meat) nachos or bison sliders would be amazing.
    Mango ginger cocktail with grilled mango skewer and limes slices in a glass jar.

    More Cool Drinks To Try

    • Grilled pineapple juice in stemless wine glass with grilled pineapple wedge garnish.
      Grilled Pineapple Juice
    • Brazilian lemonade in glasses with straws and lime wedges.
      Brazilian Lemonade (Limonada Suíça)
    • Raspberry twist cocktail in champagne glasses with lemon twist.
      Raspberry Twist Cocktail
    • Lemonade in jars with basil and blue straws.
      How to Make Lemonade

    If you tried this 🥭 Mango Ginger Cocktail Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Mango ginger cocktail in glass with mango skewer, lime slice and straw.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Mango Ginger Cocktail

    This mango ginger cocktail has summer written all over it with its bright fruity flavors paired with dark rum and ginger for some bite. It is inspired by my grilled mango skewer recipe and can be garnished with the mini skewers for a summery cocktail that you and your guests will love.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine Canadian, Caribbean
    Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 1
    Calories 234kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 3 tablespoons dark rum
    • 2 teaspoons lime juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 teaspoons agave nectar or to taste
    • ½ cup mango juice 100% with no added sugar
    • 1 teaspoon fresh ginger finely grated
    • ice
    • grilled mango mini skewer1 + lime wedge or slice optional garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Fill a cocktail glass with ice.
    • Add the dark rum, lime juice, agave nectar, mango juice and ginger.
    • Stir until combined well.
    • Add the garnishes. Serve!

    Notes

    1. Use my grilled mango recipe for the garnish. Instead of the full size skewers, use mini skewers for this drink.
    2. The nutrition information does not include the garnish.
    3. Keep the glasses and mango juice nice and chilled ahead of time.
    4. Sometimes mango juice will actually be a blend of mango and other juices like apple and/or pear if you look at the ingredients list. That is okay because mango is the main flavor but try to find juice without added sugar.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 234kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 8mg | Potassium: 52mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 873IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 1mg

    Grilled Mango Skewers

    April 26, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    I don't know about you, but I am so excited to finally get back into grilling season. I was really craving something charred and fruity and came up with this recipe for grilled mango skewers. Cubed mango is marinated in honey and dark rum for some Caribbean flair and then lightly charred on the grill.

    Grilled mango skewers on wooden serving board.

    If you have not been introduced to the tasty realm of grilled fruit, this is your time to start! Grilled fruit skewers lead to a deliciously juicy, sweet and savory snack or complement to a larger meal. Grilled pineapple slices are very common, but have you ever tried grilling mango?

    With these grilled mango skewers, you get a hit of that warm, fruity, tropical mango flavor with a touch of spice from the ginger and sweetness from the rum and honey. The grill marks turn out crispy and caramelized, adding an extra depth of flavor and texture. They are ridiculously yummy!

    These mango skewers make a tasty snack on their own, but you could round out the meal by serving them alongside grilled peppers, grilled onions (a common addition) and grilled peaches with balsamic.

    Make a mini version of these skewers and use them as a drink garnish for my Mango Ginger Cocktail, which was inspired by the marinade in this recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Grilled Mango Ingredients

    Grilled mango ingredients labeled.
    • mangoes - You want them to be ripe but not too ripe so that you can cut them nicely into cubes.
    • dark rum - Works well with lime juice in marinades for sweet and savory dishes.
    • honey - Make sure you have the liquid kind on hand so that it blends easily into the marinade.
    • lime juice - Freshly squeezed lime juice works best.
    • fresh ginger - For some bite.
    • fresh cilantro - Not pictured. This is an optional garnish that complements the mangoes well. Feel free to leave it out.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Grilled Mango Skewers

    Mango cheeks on cutting board.

    Step #1. To cut the mango for grilling: cut the 'cheeks' off of each side of the mangoes.

    Mango cubes on cutting board.

    Step #2. Cut into cubes and scoop them out with a spoon or paring knife. Place them into a large zip-top bag.

    Mango cubes in marinade.

    Step #3. In a medium bowl, whisk together the dark rum, honey, lime juice, and ginger. Add this marinade to the bag with the mangoes. Close the bag, making sure the cubes are coated. Marinate for 30 minutes at room temperature.

    Mango skewers on grill.

    Step #4. Grease the grill grates and preheat it to medium-high heat. Remove the mango cubes from the marinade (but reserve the marinade). Thread the cubed mango onto skewers and place them on the grill.

    Mango skewers on grill getting brushed with marinade.

    Step #5. Grill the mango skewers for about 3 minutes or until you see grill marks. Flip them over, brush with some of the reserved marinade and grill for another 2 minutes, or until you see grill marks on both sides.

    Grilled mango skewer on light background.

    Step #6. Garnish with fresh cilantro, if desired. Serve the grilled mango skewers immediately.

    Mango Grilling Tips

    Keep in mind that most mangoes in the grocery store are a few days off from being ripe, so be sure to plan ahead and give your mangoes enough time to ripen before grilling. This will lead to the sweetest possible mangoes.

    However, you do not want them to be over-ripe or they can end up mushy and hard to keep on the skewer.

    Your mangoes are ready to go when they have turned from mostly green to mostly red or orange, and are slightly soft when you press gently on the skin. You may be able to smell their sweet fragrance when you put them up to your nose, which is a sign of ripeness.

    You can speed up the ripening of your mangoes by placing them in a closed, brown paper bag on your counter. Just be sure to check on them daily until they are ready.

    Grilled mango skewers on wooden serving board with fresh cilantro.

    When you are skewering the mango cubes, try to keep them straight and even as much as possible so that you can achieve more uniform grill marks.

    What to Do With Leftovers

    These mango skewers are best consumed immediately. If you do have leftovers, remove them from the skewers and store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

    They can be chopped up and added to yogurt, ice cream or porridge or made into a salsa. Try tossing them in a green salad with some chunks of goat cheese (yum!) or even blending them into this mango pineapple smoothie.

    Grilled mango is a quick, fun, healthy dish option for any time you feel like firing up the grill. It pairs great with just about any commonly grilled food like chicken (try this easy kimchi chicken), shrimp and pineapple skewers and grilled bison ribeye. It can be endlessly customized to suit your taste and preferences. Happy grilling!

    Grilled mango skewers on wooden serving board with fresh cilantro and marinade on the side.

    More Delicious Grilled Food

    • Marinated flank steak cooking on charcoal grill.
      How to Grill Carne Asada
    • Grilled avocado halves stuffed with pico de gallo on cutting board.
      Grilled Stuffed Avocado
    • Skewered and foil-pack tomatoes on grill.
      How to Grill Tomatoes
    • Bison burger with toothpick on cutting board.
      Bison Burgers

    If you tried this 🥭 Grilled Mango Skewers Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grilled cubed mango on wooden skewers.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Grilled Mango Skewers

    With this grilled mango recipe, cubed mango is marinated in honey and dark rum for some Caribbean flair and then lightly charred on the grill on skewers.
    Course Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American, Caribbean
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time: 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 skewers
    Calories 120kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill
    • Wooden skewers

    Ingredients

    • 4 mangoes ripened but still firm
    • ¼ cup dark rum
    • ¼ cup liquid honey
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
    • fresh cilantro chopped (optional garnish)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Cut the 'cheeks' off of each side of the mangoes. Cut into cubes and scoop them out with a spoon or paring knife. Place them into a large zip-top bag.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the dark rum, honey, lime juice, and ginger. Add this marinade to the bag with the mangoes. Close the bag, making sure the cubes are coated. Marinate for 30 minutes at room temperature.
    • Grease the grill grates and preheat it to medium-high heat. Remove the mango cubes from the marinade (but reserve the marinade). Thread the cubed mango onto skewers and place them on the grill.
    • Grill the mango skewers for about 3 minutes or until you see grill marks. Flip them over, brush with some of the reserved marinade and grill for another 2 minutes, or until you see grill marks on both sides.
    • Garnish with fresh cilantro, if desired. Serve immediately.

    Notes

    • Keep in mind that most mangoes in the grocery store are a few days off from being ripe, so be sure to plan ahead and give your mangoes enough time to ripen before grilling. This will lead to the sweetest possible mangoes.
    • Your mangoes are ready to go when they have turned from mostly green to mostly red or orange, and are slightly soft when you press gently on the skin. You may be able to smell their sweet fragrance when you put them up to your nose, which is a sign of ripeness. However, you do not want them to be over-ripe or they can end up mushy and hard to keep on the skewer.
    • You can speed up the ripening of your mangoes by placing them in a closed, brown paper bag on your counter. Just be sure to check on them daily until they are ready.
    • When you are skewering the mango cubes, try to keep them straight and even as much as possible so that you can achieve more uniform grill marks. Leave room at the end of the skewer.
    • These mango skewers are best consumed immediately. If you do have leftovers, remove them from the skewers and store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 285mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 1793IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    All About Basil: Types, Substitutes, Recipes and More

    April 20, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Basil is one of the most popular herbs worldwide and has been used for centuries in cooking, medicine, and even religious ceremonies. This aromatic herb has a distinct flavor that can enhance the taste of many dishes, from pasta sauces to soups and salads. But did you know that basil also has numerous health benefits?

    I dive into everything you need to know about basil, including its history, different varieties, and even how it compares to other popular seeds like chia. So, please grab a cup of tea and let's explore basil together.

    Fresh green basil leaves.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Basil?

    Basil (Ocimum basilicum) is an annual herb belonging to the mint family. It has a sweet, earthy aroma and is commonly used in culinary and medicinal practices.

    Where Did Basil Originate?

    Basil is believed to be native to tropical regions of central Africa and Southeast Asia but has been widely used worldwide. It has been cultivated in many different cultures for thousands of years. The plant is believed to have originated specifically in India, where it was first used for medicinal purposes and religious rituals.

    The herb has played an important role in many cultures throughout history. In ancient Egypt, basil was used in the embalming process and was believed to have healing powers. Basil was associated with hatred in Ancient Greece but is now a symbol of fertility in some religious rituals and is believed to bring good luck and wealth. In Hindu culture, holy basil is considered a sacred herb.

    Map with a marker that points to India.

    Basil spread to other parts of the world due to the spice trade from India. It was introduced to the Mediterranean, where they used it in their cooking and as a medicinal herb. Basil became particularly popular in Italy, where it became a key ingredient in traditional Italian cuisine.

    Basil was also introduced to the Americas by European settlers. Today, basil is grown worldwide, with major exporters including India, Egypt and Thailand.

    What Does it Taste Like?

    Basil has a strong, distinct and aromatic flavor profile that can be described as sweet and peppery, with a slight hint of clove, mint and anise. The flavor is bright, fresh, and herbaceous.

    The basil leaves are rich in essential oils, giving them a distinctive aroma and flavor. It is noticeable when the leaves are bruised, rubbed or crushed, which helps to release the natural oils. This oil can be described as sweet and slightly floral.

    The taste of basil can vary slightly depending on the specific type of basil. For example, sweet basil has a milder flavor than Thai basil, which has a more pronounced licorice flavor. However, all types of basil share a similar flavor profile that is both distinctive and versatile.

    When fresh basil is added to dishes, it provides a bright, refreshing flavor that can help cut the acidity and enhance sweetness. For this reason it is often used as a finishing herb in tomato-based pasta sauces, grilled pizzas, and salads.

    What Does it Look Like?

    A large backyard Sweet Basil plant with flower stalks and small white blooms.

    The Stem: Basil is easily recognizable by its distinct appearance. The herb has a tall, slender stem and usually grows to a height of about 1-2 feet (30-60 cm) tall. The stem is green and hairy but depending on the basil type can be tinged with a purple hue. The stem branches out and is covered with solid, green leaves arranged in pairs along the length of the stem.

    The Leaves: The leaves have a pointed, oval-shape and range in size from about 2" to 4" long, depending on the variety. They have a soft texture and smooth, slightly glossy/waxy appearance. The color is typically bright green, although some varieties may have hints of purple or red. Along the veins they can appear to be bumpy.

    The Flowers: As the plant grows it will develop clusters at the top of the stem, of small, delicate flowers in shades of white to pink to purple (depending on the variety) that bloom during summer, towards the end of the growing season. They can add a stunning ornamental touch to gardens and floral arrangements.

    How to Pick Basil Leaves

    A gardener's gloved hand planting Basil with a small trowel in a herb garden with rich composted soil.
    • There may be times when you only need a few leaves rather than entire stems of basil. Picking basil leaves may seem like a simple task, but there are some techniques to ensure that you harvest the freshest and most flavorful leaves possible.
    • Firstly, it's important to select the right leaves. When selecting fresh basil leaves, look for a bright green color free of yellow or brown spots. The leaves should be firm and not wilted or limp.
    • When harvesting basil from a plant, pick the leaves in the morning after the dew has dried before the day's heat sets in. This will ensure that the leaves are at their freshest and most flavorful.
    • It's important to use a gentle touch when picking basil leaves. If you're using your fingers, pinch each leaf at its base where it connects to the stem, starting at the top of the plant. If you're using scissors, snip the stem just below the leaves. Avoid pulling or tearing the leaves, damaging the plant, and affecting future growth.
    • When picking basil leaves, it's important to leave a few sets of leaves on the plant to allow it to continue growing and avoid picking from the bottom of the plant. This will ensure a steady supply of fresh basil throughout the growing season.
    • If your basil plant is becoming too large or bushy, it's okay to prune it back. Pruning can encourage new growth and a more robust plant. Remember to start from the top; this will enable the plant to grow new branches and leaves.

    How Do You Store Fresh Basil?

    Properly storing fresh basil is essential for preserving its flavor and texture. Basil is a delicate herb that can wilt and turn black or brown quickly if not stored correctly. The following are some steps that can help you store fresh basil.

    PRO TIP: The success of storing fresh basil begins with the timing of picking it from the plant. The best time to harvest basil is in the morning, just after the dew has dried. The basil leaves are at their freshest and will retain their flavor longer.

    📋Recipe

    Fresh basil plant.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    How to Store Fresh Basil

    Properly storing fresh basil is essential for preserving its flavor and texture. Basil is a delicate herb that can wilt and turn black or brown quickly if not stored correctly. The following are some steps that can help you store fresh basil:
    Prep Time 1 minute minute
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 11 minutes minutes
    Servings 1 bunch
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 1 pair of trimming scissors
    • 1 glass jar
    • 1 plastic bag

    Ingredients

    • 1 bunch fresh basil

    Instructions

    • Trim the stems: Starting at the top of the plant, trim the stems at a 45-degree angle.
    • Clean the basil: Rinse the basil leaves gently under cold water to remove dirt or debris. Be careful not to bruise or damage the leaves, as this can cause them to wilt more quickly.
    • Store the basil: There are several ways to store fresh basil. Refrigeration can actually cause the leaves to go black so I recommend the room temperature or freezer method. Choose the method that works best for you based on how long you plan to keep the basil.

    Room Temperature Storage:

    • Place the basil stems in a glass or jar filled with about an inch of water, making sure no leaves are submerged in the water.
    • Cover the leaves loosely with a plastic bag, allowing air to circulate.
    • Store at room temperature and change the water every one to two days.

    Freezer Storage:

    • You can also freeze fresh basil to extend its shelf life. Blanch the basil leaves in boiling water for only 10 seconds, then immediately transfer them to a bowl of ice water to stop them from cooking further.
    • Pat the leaves dry, then transfer them to a freezer-safe container or bag.
    • Be sure to label and date the container before storing in the freezer. Use it within 3-4 months. You can add the frozen basil directly to soups, sauces, etc.

    Fresh basil is best used within a few days of picking. The longer it sits, the more the flavor will diminish. Following these steps for proper storage should help extend the shelf life of your fresh basil so that you can enjoy its delicious flavor and aroma for as long as possible.

    Basil Types

    There are many different types of basil, each with its own distinct flavor and appearance. Here are some of the most common types of basil:

    1. Sweet Basil

    Sweet Genovese basil.

    Sweet basil is the most common type of basil you will see in the supermarkets and the kind that is used in Italian cuisine (the Genovese variety). It has large, bright green leaves with a sweet, slightly peppery flavor. Common uses include pesto, tomato sauce, and Caprese salad dishes. It can also be used in teas and infused oils.

    Sweet basil grows well in warm climates and requires full morning sun and well-drained soil. It is easy to grow from seed or can be purchased as a seedling at a nursery or garden center.

    2. Thai Basil

    Pile of fresh Thai basil leaves isolated on white background.

    Thai basil (Ocimum basilicum var. thyrsiflora) is a basil native to Southeast Asia, hence the name. Its distinct flavor profile has a sweet, licorice and anise-like taste. Its leaves are a bit smaller than sweet basil and are serrated with purple stems.

    Like sweet basil, it is also added fresh to recipes. It's commonly used in Thai, Vietnamese, and Laotian cuisine, where it's added to soups, stir-fries, and curries. Thai basil is also used to make the famous Vietnamese noodle soup dish called pho. Although it's a popular herb in Asian countries, it is easy to grow in most climates, making it a great addition to any herb garden.

    3. Lemon Basil

    Lemon Basil, whole stems with leaves, isolated on white background.

    Lemon basil has a distinct lemony scent and flavor that make it a popular choice for fish, herbal teas and desserts. It has green leaves that are slightly more narrow than the common type.

    This type of basil is usually grown in the tropical regions of Asia and Africa but can grow in other parts of the world indoors or during the warmer seasons. Its oils contain citral and limonene, which are compounds that give lemon basil its flavor but also have anti-inflammatory, antifungal, and antimicrobial properties. Lemon basil can also be a good source of vitamins A, C and K.

    4. Lime Basil

    Lime basil also has a unique, citrus flavor and aroma that is similar to lemon basil though it is less common. This also makes it an excellent addition to drinks, salads, and desserts. Lime basil is often used in Thai, Malaysian and Indonesian cuisine, fresh or steamed as well as cooked into dishes.

    5. Purple Basil

    Fresh purple basil leaves on brown wooden table.

    Also known as dark opal basil, it is a variety of sweet basil with dark purple leaves. It is primarily grown as an ornamental plant but also used in food preparation and medicine. The leaves of purple basil have a slightly spicy flavor similar to sweet basil but with a more pronounced clove-like taste.

    In addition to its unique flavor, the anthocyanins that give the leaves their purple color also have antioxidant properties. Purple basil isn't recommended for cooking due to an unappealing color change, but its striking color when fresh makes it a popular garnish for salads, pesto and infused oils.

    6. Holy Basil

    Holy basil in the garden.

    Also known as Tulsi, holy basil is a sacred plant in Hinduism and is widely used in Ayurvedic medicine. It has a strong aroma with notes of mint, citrus and licorice. In Ayurvedic medicine, holy basil is used to help treat various ailments such as stress, respiratory and stomach disorders, as well as fever.

    Holy basil is used in traditional Thai cuisine, where it is known as Krapow and is a key ingredient in dishes such as Pad Krapow Gai (Thai Basil Chicken).

    7. Cinnamon Basil

    Basil cinnamon isolated on white.

    Cinnamon basil, also known as Mexican spice basil, has a sweet and spicy flavor with notes of cinnamon due to containing methyl cinnamate. The plant can grow up to 30" tall and 24" wide and produces small dark purple flowers.

    Cinnamon basil is a popular ingredient in herbal teas and adds a unique flavor to baked goods. It can be added to both sweet and savory dishes and is commonly used in Asian cuisine. This type of basil is also known for its medicinal properties and is often used as a natural remedy for inflammatory and digestive issues.

    Substitutes for Cooking

    Although basil is an incredibly popular herb, sometimes you can't get your hands on it when you need it in a pinch. Fortunately, there are some substitutes you can use to mimic the flavor profile of basil in your cooking. Here are some of the most common substitutes for basil:

    1. Dried Basil

    Dried Basil in a wooden spoon on wooden background.

    Keeping dried basil on hand is an easy and common way to substitute for fresh basil in many recipes. However, if you are in need of a fresh herb substitute, you will want to look at one of the alternative options below.

    Substitute Ratio: 1:3 The general rule of thumb is to use one-third of dried basil as you would fresh basil. For example, if a recipe calls for 1 tablespoon of fresh basil, you would use 1 teaspoon of dried basil.

    1 tablespoon fresh basil = 1 teaspoon dried basil

    This ratio works when substituting most dried herbs for fresh.

    2. Oregano

    Fresh and dry oregano on wooden boards.

    Oregano is a popular herb frequently used as a substitute for basil in many dishes. Its flavor profile is similar to basil, but it has a more pungent and earthy taste, with hints of clove, mint and pine.

    Uses: Oregano pairs well with tomato-based dishes, meat, poultry, fish, and vegetables. It is also used in marinades, dressings, and sauces.

    Substitute Ratio: When substituting oregano for basil, use a 1:1 ratio or a little less, as it has a stronger flavor.

    3. Marjoram

    Fresh marjoram close up.

    Marjoram, which is a common substitute for oregano because of its similar flavor, makes it a good substitute for basil as well. It has a slightly sweeter and milder flavor compared to oregano.

    Uses: It is commonly used in Italian, French, and Greek cuisines and can also be used to season sauces, marinades, vegetables and tomato-based dishes.

    Substitute Ratio: When substituting basil with marjoram, use a 1:1 ratio for both fresh and dried.

    4. Thyme

    Freshy thyme bundle isolated on white.

    Thyme is a fragrant herb with small leaves. It has a unique, mild flavor that is often described as earthy, slightly sweet, and somewhat minty and blends well with other herbs. One thing to consider is some types of basil (such as Thai basil) have more of a licorice taste which may not come through with the thyme.

    Uses: Thyme is commonly used in French, Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisines. It is used to flavor soups, stews, fish and meats like lamb and chicken.

    Substitute Ratio: 2:1 when swapping fresh thyme for fresh basil (so 2 tablespoons fresh thyme for every tablespoon of fresh basil) and 1:1 for dried because drying basil tones the flavor down.

    5. Sage

    Fresh leaves of garden sage on wooden background.

    Sage has a similar but stronger earthy flavor to basil with a hint of mint and citrus. It can be substituted for basil in some dishes.

    Uses: It is particularly good in heavy and rich, meat-based dishes because of its bold flavor. It is also used in stuffing, sauces, brown butter, breads and even cocktails.

    Substitute Ratio: 1:1 Instead of adding fresh sage towards the end of cooking like you would basil, add it earlier to help cook out and mellow its stronger flavor.

    6. Parsley

    tied fresh parsley on wooden surface

    Parsley has a mild, slightly bitter, clean flavor that complements many savory dishes. The herb has flat or curly leaves, depending on the variety.

    Uses: It is widely used as a garnish but can be a good replacement for basil in Italian and tomato-based dishes.

    Substitute Ratio: 1:1 or more to taste. While parsley has a distinct flavor, it is less intense than basil, making it a good substitute for those who find basil overpowering.

    7. Cilantro

    Bunch of fresh cilantro on a board with a knife.

    Cilantro, also known as coriander, can add depth and complexity to various recipes. It has a distinct and unique flavor that is often described as citrusy, earthy, and slightly spicy. However, it's worth noting that cilantro has a polarizing taste, and some people may find its flavor soapy or unpleasant.

    Uses: Cilantro is a popular herb in Mexican, Thai, and Indian cuisines. It can be used as a substitute for Thai basil in dishes that require a fresh, herbaceous flavor.

    Substitute Ratio: 1:1 fresh

    8. Mint

    Fresh mint in a bowl on a wooden background.

    Mint is an herb commonly used in Mediterranean, Middle Eastern, and Indian cuisines that comes from the same plant family as basil. It is a great substitute for basil because it has a similar freshness, color and sweet taste but keep in mind that it does have an aftertaste that basil doesn't.

    Uses: Mint leaves are used in salads, cocktails, teas, and desserts, and they pair well with lamb, yogurt, and lemon. Mint can be easily grown at home and is a versatile and tasty alternative to basil in some salads, desserts, drinks and sauces.

    Substitute Ratio: 1:2 or to taste. Start by using half of the amount of fresh mint in place of fresh basil and go from there.

    Health Benefits of Basil

    Not only is basil a versatile and delicious herb in cooking, but it also offers a wide range of health benefits. Here are some of the many health benefits of basil:

    1. Anti-inflammatory Properties

    Basil contains essential oils such as eugenol, citral (in Lemon Basil), and linalool, which have been shown to have anti-inflammatory properties. Eugenol, for example, has been found to inhibit the production of certain inflammatory mediators.

    2. Antioxidant Properties

    Basil is rich in antioxidants such as flavonoids, carotenoids, and phenolic acids. The antioxidant properties of basil can help protect against the damage caused by free radicals. Preclinical studies have demonstrated that the phytochemicals in Holy basil in particular may potentially help reduce the risk of developing certain types of cancer, such as liver, lung, and skin cancer.

    3. Digestive Health

    Basil can help improve digestive health by reducing inflammation, balancing pH levels and promoting the growth of healthy gut bacteria. Basil also has carminative properties, which can help ease indigestion, cramps and other digestive issues. Carminative herbs can help reduce gas and bloating in the digestive tract.

    4. Respiratory Health

    Holy basil has been known to be used as a natural expectorant. Expectorants are substances that help loosen mucus in the lungs, making it easier to cough up and expel it.

    5. Stress Reduction

    Basil has been traditionally used in Ayurvedic medicine to promote mental clarity and reduce stress. This is done by reducing the production of stress hormones when elevated, such as cortisol.

    Basil Seeds vs. Chia Seeds

    Basil and chia seeds are often compared because they look similar and have similar uses.

    Basil Seeds

    Closeup of sweet basil seeds in a bowl and wooden spoon.

    Basil seeds are small, black seeds that come from the basil plant. They look similar to chia seeds, which is why they are often confused for one another.

    They are commonly used in South Asian beverages such as falooda. Basil seeds are a good source of fiber and are rich in minerals such as calcium and magnesium. They have a mild, nutty flavor and are used in some dishes as a thickener. When soaked in water, the preferred way to eat them, basil seeds swell up and form a gel-like substance. They aren't typically eaten dry since they can be hard to chew.

    Chia Seeds

    bowl of healthy chia seeds and wooden spoon on white background

    Chia seeds are small, black or white seeds from the chia plant with a subtle taste. They are a popular ingredient often used in smoothies, chia pudding, oatmeal, and other healthy recipes. Chia seeds are a good source of fiber and are rich in omega-3 fatty acids, which are important for heart health.

    When soaked in water, chia seeds also absorb a lot of water, but they take longer to swell up and don't form as much gel as basil seeds. They can be eaten dry or soaked.

    Differences Between Basil Seeds and Chia Seeds

    •Water Absorption: One of the key differences between basil seeds and chia seeds is their ability to absorb water. Basil seeds absorb water more quickly and become larger than chia seeds but both form a gel-like substance. This property makes them a popular ingredient in drinks and desserts.

    closeup of gelled sweet basil seeds in glass bowl

    •Nutritional Content: While basil seeds and chia seeds are good sources of fiber and nutrients, they have slightly different nutritional profiles. Chia seeds are a better source of omega-3 fatty acids. Basil seeds, on the other hand, contain more fiber and calcium and are slightly lower in fat.

    •Culinary Use: Both seeds can be used in similar recipes such as smoothies and baked goods. Basil seeds are commonly used in Southeast Asian and Indian drinks such as falooda and are usually only used in soaked preparations, while chia seeds can be eaten dry or soaked and are often used in smoothies, oatmeal, salads and cereals.

    •Flavor: Both basil seeds and chia seeds have a mild, nutty flavor, but some people find that basil seeds have a slightly stronger flavor than chia seeds, which are described as being bland.

    •Appearance: While basil seeds and chia seeds look similar, they have some subtle differences in appearance. Basil seeds are black and a bit larger and rounder in shape than chia seeds. On the other hand, Chia seeds are slightly more oval, with a mottled appearance and can be both black and white.

    Basil Temperature Tolerance

    Basil is a warm-weather herb that thrives in hot temperatures and can withstand heat a little better than other herbs, such as sage and oregano. However, the herb is sensitive to extreme temperatures and frost, which can cause damage and even death to the plant.

    Basil grows best in temperatures between 80°F to 90°F (27°C to 32°C). When the temperature drops below 50°F (10°C), the plant may suffer from cold damage and stunted growth.

    On the other hand, when the temperature exceeds 95°F (35°C), the plant may wilt and become stressed. The high heat may even affect the flavor negatively.

    Small pot with a dying Basil plant in day light.

    To ensure the proper growth and development of basil, it is essential to maintain an optimal temperature range:

    Hot climate: If you live in an area with hot summers, growing basil in partial shade or in a location that receives morning sun and afternoon shade is advisable. Also be sure to keep the plant hydrated. This will protect the plant from scorching heat and prevent it from wilting.

    Cool climate: If you live in a cooler climate, you can grow basil indoors in a sunny window or a greenhouse to maintain a warmer temperature. On cool nights, the plant can be protected by covering it with a sheet or bringing it indoors.

    Are Basil Flowers Edible?

    Fresh basil purple flowers in the garden

    Basil produces small white, purple or pink flowers usually in late summer. While the flowers may look attractive, many gardeners wonder if they are edible. The answer is yes. Basil flowers are edible and can be used in cooking to brighten up and beautify dishes.

    The flowers have a milder flavor than the leaves and will have slight differences depending on the cultivar. They can be used dried or fresh as a garnish for a pop of color or added to salads, soups, sauces, drinks and desserts.

    However, it is important to note that once the basil plant starts to flower, the leaves may lose some flavor and turn bitter. To prevent this, you can pinch off the flower buds as soon as they appear. This will encourage the plant to focus its energy on producing new leaves. Additionally, removing the flowers will help extend the plant's productivity and prevent it from going to seed.

    How to Use Basil

    • make flavored oils, syrups and vinegars by infusing them with fresh basil
    • grow basil sprouts
    • brew herbal basil tea or make essential oil
    • freeze fresh basil into ice cubes for beverages
    • blend the fresh leaves into banana ice cream
    • use fresh and dried basil in food and drink like cocktails, sauces, pasta, pesto, gnocchi, on pizza and salads, etc.

    Here are some of my favorite fresh basil recipes:

    1
    Lemon basil pasta with chicken and Parmesan cheese on plate.
    Lemon Basil Pasta
    In this lemon basil pasta, thin angel hair noodles are paired with a creamy, zesty white wine sauce, fresh basil, Parmesan and golden cubes of chicken breast.
    Lemon Basil Pasta Recipe
    2
    Fresh basil hummus in bowl with pine nuts.
    Quick Basil Hummus
    This fresh basil hummus sprinkled with pine nuts and olive oil is a quick and easy, vegan snack for any occasion. It's an earthy, refreshing dip that pairs well with picnic lunches, backyard get-togethers and more.
    Quick Basil Hummus Recipe
    3
    Watermelon salad with basil in black salad bowl.
    Watermelon Basil Salad
    This healthy, watermelon basil salad is fresh and fruity with a great combination of textures and flavors. It's served over a bed of leafy greens and topped with a refreshing, homemade, watermelon reduction vinaigrette.
    Watermelon Basil Salad Recipe
    4
    Potato galette with basil pesto sliced in half.
    Potato Galette with Basil Pesto
    If you are craving a savory pie with delicious flavors but simple steps, this potato galette smothered in basil pesto will hit the spot.
    Potato Galette with Basil Pesto Recipe
    5
    Burrata salad with pesto dressing.
    Burrata Salad With Basil Pesto Dressing
    This burrata salad recipe takes a fresh piece of burrata cheese and surrounds it with chopped tomatoes, leafy greens and a flavorful basil pesto dressing.
    Burrata Salad Recipe
    6
    Caprese pasta salad with pesto on clear plate.
    Caprese Pesto Pasta Salad
    Cool and refreshing, this easy Caprese pasta salad takes a classic summer dish and adds a delicious Italian twist. This recipe combines cooked pasta with a blend of basil, tomatoes and bite-sized balls of mozzarella cheese that add a light creaminess to the dish.
    Caprese Pesto Pasta Salad Recipe
    7
    Mini caprese skewers arranged on plate with NYE decorations on the side.
    Caprese Skewers
    These caprese and prosciutto mini skewers for New Year's Eve are small, delicious and perfect for snacking while you're watching the ball drop or pouring another glass of champagne.
    Caprese Skewers Recipe
    8
    Creamy Tuscan chicken breast in skillet.
    Creamy Skillet Tuscan Chicken
    This electric skillet creamy Tuscan chicken with sun-dried tomatoes and kale is an easy week-night dinner that will take only 30 minutes of your time.
    Creamy Skillet Tuscan Chicken Recipe
    9
    Grilled bread on outdoor grill with tongs.
    Grilled Bruschetta Bread
    Whether you're wondering how to grill bread, are on the lookout for a flavorful appetizer for your next get-together or simply want to find something new to do with your leftover bread, this delicious recipe is sure to satisfy.
    Grilled Bruschetta Bread Recipe
    10
    Electric skillet fried fish on a plate with basil pesto in the background and basil leaves on the dish.
    Basil Crusted Fried Fish
    This electric skillet fried fish is golden and crisp on the outside, moist and perfectly flaky on the inside.
    Basil Crusted Fried Fish Recipe
    11
    Lemonade in jars with basil and blue straws.
    How to Make Lemonade With Basil
    My recipe tutorial for how to make lemonade from scratch is easy to put together. Whether it's for a party, a front yard stand, or just to cool off in the summer heat, this delicious summer drink with real lemon will knock your socks off. The flavors are nice and concentrated so that the drink holds up to loads of ice!
    How to Make Lemonade Recipe
    12
    Electric skillet spaghetti alfredo on plate.
    One Pan Chicken Alfredo Spaghetti
    This electric skillet spaghetti with golden chicken breast cubes and Parmesan cheese is creamy, flavorful and delicious. It is made entirely in one pan, including the spaghetti noodles.
    One Pan Chicken Alfredo Spaghetti Recipe
    13
    Creamy tomato gnocchi in bowl with pea purée.
    Creamy Tomato Gnocchi
    This cheesy, creamy tomato gnocchi and pea purée are a surprisingly, perfect combination. The dish works well as a filling, vegetarian main dish.
    Creamy Tomato Gnocchi Recipe
    14
    Caprese salad in small white dish.
    Caprese Salad
    Are you looking for a light dish for those hot summer nights? This fancy caprese salad with cherry tomatoes and balsamic is the perfect balance of refreshing fresh veggies, delicious bocconcini cheese, and zesty balsamic vinegar.
    Caprese Salad Recipe With Cherry Tomatoes
    15
    Grilled shrimp and pineapple on rosemary skewers.
    Grilled Shrimp on Rosemary Skewers
    These grilled shrimp on rosemary skewers with rum-soaked pineapple wedges will absolutely be a hit at your party. The sweet, liquor-infused fruit is a fun and tasty addition to the savory shrimp.
    Grilled Shrimp on Rosemary Skewers Recipe
    16
    Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
    Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail
    This frozen watermelon basil cocktail with fresh lime juice, chunks of frozen watermelon, white rum and basil takes only five minutes to prepare!
    Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail Recipe

    Basil Nutrition Information

    According to Healthline, every 1 tablespoon of fresh, sweet basil contains the following nutrients:

    • 0.6 calories
    • 3% of the RDI (Recommended Daily Intake) of Vitamin A
    • 13% of the RDI of Vitamin K
    • 0.5% of the RDI of Calcium
    • 0.5% of the RDI of Iron
    • 1.5% of the RDI of Manganese

    Conclusion

    Basil is a versatile herb used in various dishes. From its origins in India to its use in Mediterranean cuisine, basil has a rich history and diverse varieties.

    Whether you are a beginner gardener or an experienced cook, understanding the basics of basil can help you grow and use this herb to its fullest potential. By choosing the right variety, storing it correctly, and using it creatively, you can enjoy basil's unique flavor and benefits all year round.

    So, go ahead and experiment with this flavorful herb in your cooking, and see how it can elevate your dishes to new heights!

    Do you feel like a basil expert now? I hope that this article encourages readers to find inspiration to incorporate basil into their diets and/or start growing this amazing herb at home.

    🌿 If you enjoyed this informative post All About Basil: Types, Substitutes, Recipes and More or any other post on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe! 🌿

    Photo Credit: depositphotos.com

    Easy Hawaiian Mai Tai Recipe

    April 19, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Add a fruity, tropical twist to your cocktails with this easy Hawaiian Mai Tai recipe. This cool, refreshing Tiki drink is perfect on hot summer days when you've been working, playing or vacationing outside.

    Mai tais in cocktail glasses with umbrella, mango slice, mint sprig and straw on black background.

    If you're having a pool party or backyard BBQ, this recipe makes an entire batch that you can double or triple and serve in a pitcher for your guests. I love serving this cocktail with my grilled mango.

    If you have the ingredients on hand, this drink takes only a few minutes to combine in a pitcher for your guests.

    I also made another tiki drink called the Fog Cutter drink that you might want to give a try.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Easy Hawaiian Mai Tai Ingredients

    Hawaiian Mai Tai ingredients labeled.
    • aged rum - Aged rum is paired with orange liqueur (an alcoholic drink flavored with orange peels) in a Mai Tai. The result gives your drink a bright kick of citrus.
    • orange liqueur - You can choose from Triple Sec, Cointreau (the most common) or Grand Marnier. Grand Marnier is a bit heavier than Cointreau and more expensive. Triple sec has a slightly lower alcohol content and price.
    • lime juice - Freshly squeezed.
    • orgeat syrup - You can either buy orgeat online or make homemade orgeat, which gives a slight nutty, floral flavor to enhance the drink.
    • pineapple juice - 100% with no sugar added.
    • mango juice - Also 100% juice with no sugar added.
    • grenadine syrup - This version of Mai Tai adds mango and pineapple juices for a fruitier flavor. The juices plus the grenadine add more sweetness to this typically strong/tart drink.
    • garnishes - Fresh mint and mango slices.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Choosing an Aged Rum

    Aged rum on a wooden table and a barrel.

    Credit: Photo by depositphotos.com

    This Tiki drink recipe uses aged rum, which matures in oak barrels for years until it's ready to be bottled, giving it more character. Each type of oak contributes different flavors that can make your rum sweet, nutty or smoky.

    As for the best rum to use for this Mai Tai, you can explore with dark rums that have been aged for 4, 8 or even 12 plus years. You can try a commercial rum, such as Appleton Estate (aged for 12 years) or Captain Morgan (aged for 2 years), or your favorite family-owned brand.

    How to Make it

    Mai Tai ingredients in glass pitcher with spoon.

    Step 1. Combine ingredients. Add the aged rum, orange liqueur, lime juice, orgeat syrup, pineapple juice and mango juice to a small pitcher. Stir until combined.

    Mai tais in cocktail glasses with umbrellas, mango slices, mint sprigs and straws.

    Step 2. Pour & Serve. Fill 4 cocktail glasses with ice (about ½ way up the glass). Pour the mixture into each glass. Add 1 teaspoon of grenadine into each glass. Garnish with fresh mint sprigs and mango slices. Serve!

    Joss' Tips

    • An old-fashioned glass works great for this drink but you can use any cocktail glass you have on hand.
    • Use clear glasses so that your guests can admire the festive colors.
    • If you're wondering how much ice to fill each glass with, I recommend filling them about halfway with crushed ice or ice cubes to gradually dilute and chill the drink without making it too watery.
    • If you don't have a fresh mango on hand, you can garnish your drinks with cherries or pineapple.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is Mai Tai popular in Hawaii?

    It is indeed popular in Hawaii, however, it apparently originated in California.

    What does Mai Tai mean in Hawaiian?

    It apparently comes from maitaʻi, the Tahitian word for "good" or "excellence".

    What is the main alcohol in a Mai Tai?

    Aged rum is the main alcohol in a Mai Tai, accompanied by orange liqueur.

    Is Mai Tai a strong drink?

    Most Mai Tai drinks are fairly strong, but the amount can vary with each recipe. The fruitier versions are a bit lighter.

    What is the difference between Mai Tai and Hawaiian Mai Tai?

    This Hawaiian Mai Tai is sweeter than a regular Mai Tai with its addition of fruit juices.

    Mai tais in cocktail glasses with umbrella, mango slice, mint sprig and straw on concrete-style background.

    ❤️ More Cocktails You Will Love

    • Spring white wine sangria in wine glass.
      Spring White Wine Sangria
    • Raspberry twist cocktail in champagne glasses with lemon twist.
      Raspberry Twist Cocktail
    • Top view of mulled wine with orange slices and cinnamon sticks.
      Electric Skillet Mulled Wine
    • Strawberry liqueur in jar with fresh strawberries on the side.
      Strawberry Liqueur

    If you tried this 🏝️🍹 Easy Hawaiian Mai Tai Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Hawaiian Mai Tais with umbrellas, straws and mango slices.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Easy Hawaiian Mai Tai Recipe

    Add a fruity, tropical twist to your cocktails with this easy Hawaiian Mai Tai recipe. If you're having a pool party or backyard BBQ, this recipe makes an entire batch that you can double or triple and serve in a pitcher for your guests.
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American, Hawaiian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 254kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    For the Drink

    • ½ cup aged rum
    • ¼ cup orange liqueur Cointreau, Triple Sec or Grand Marnier
    • 3 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
    • ¼ cup orgeat syrup
    • 1 cup pineapple juice no sugar added
    • 1 cup mango juice no sugar added
    • crushed ice or ice cubes
    • 4 teaspoons grenadine syrup 1 teaspoon per glass

    Garnishes

    • fresh mint sprigs
    • mango slices
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add the aged rum, orange liqueur, lime juice, orgeat syrup, pineapple juice and mango juice to a small pitcher. Stir until combined.
    • Fill 4 cocktail glasses with ice (about ½ way up the glass). Pour the mixture into each glass. Add 1 teaspoon of grenadine into each glass.
    • Garnish with fresh mint sprigs and mango slices. Serve!

    Notes

    • An old-fashioned glass works great for this drink but you can use any cocktail glass you have on hand.
    • Grand Marnier is a bit heavier than Cointreau and more expensive. Triple sec has a slightly lower alcohol content and price.
    • As for the best rum to use for this Mai Tai, you can explore with dark rums that have been aged for 4, 8 or even 12 plus years. You can try a commercial rum, such as Appleton Estate (aged for 12 years) or Captain Morgan (aged for 2 years), or your favorite family-owned brand.
    • If you're wondering how much ice to fill each glass with, I recommend filling them about halfway with crushed ice or ice cubes to gradually dilute and chill the drink without making it too watery.
    • If you don't have a fresh mango on hand, you can garnish your drinks with cherries or pineapple.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.05g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 125mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 37g | Vitamin A: 443IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 1mg

    Bison Stew

    April 12, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This crockpot bison stew with red wine and mushrooms makes a hearty, low effort weeknight dinner. Preparation time is only 10 minutes, and tossing everything in the slow cooker allows you to go about your day while your meal cooks.

    Bison stew with fresh thyme in a light-colored bowl, mashed potatoes and white flowers in the background.

    It is a worthy alternative to a classic, beef-based St. Patrick's day stew, so it is also a great option for any festivities that you may be hosting on that day.

    The way the meat is slow cooked until tender turns out similar to my recipe for how to braise beef but the slow cooker makes it even easier!

    If you like making meals in the slow cooker, you can also check out this slow cooker spicy shredded Mexican chicken (a favorite of mine) and Mexican soup.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Bison stew ingredients labeled.
    • bison chuck roast - To start, be sure to select a proper bison chuck roast for your dish. Bison is becoming a popular red meat option and is therefore relatively easy to find in most supermarket chains. Sometimes you can find chuck roast already cubed, labeled as 'stew meat', or you can simply cut up a chuck roast yourself. If your local store does not have a bison roast, then you may consider checking out your local farmers' market as there is often at least one vendor that offers bison meat. Some local farmers may even offer a delivery option.
    • all-purpose flour - The flour will help thicken the stew as it cooks in the crock-pot.
    • vegetable broth - I use regular, prepared vegetable broth but if you're watching your salt intake you can also find low sodium in the supermarket.
    • red wine - My favorite for cooking is cabernet sauvignon.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • bison chuck roast - Chuck roast is one of the most favorable cuts for making stew, but you could also get away with a rump roast, cross rib roast or boneless bison short ribs, depending on price and availability. Slow cooking these cuts of bison will almost always yield a tender and tasty meal! Do not use a tender cut as that would be better for a quick-cooking stew, like this kimchi beef stew.
    • red wine - You can substitute with balsamic or red wine vinegar if you don't want to use wine.
    • button mushrooms - Substitute with chanterelles (if you're not sure what they are exactly, check out this easy chanterelle recipes list).

    How to Make Bison Stew

    Make this stew in 3 easy steps using only the slow cooker! No extra pans required.

    Bison stew meat in slow cooker with flour.

    Step 1. Mix the cubed bison with the flour, salt and pepper in a slow cooker.

    Bison stew ingredients in slow cooker with wooden spoon.

    Step 2. Add the mushrooms, onions, garlic, vegetable broth, red wine, brown sugar and dried thyme. Mix. Cover with the lid and cook on high heat for 4 hours or until the meat is tender.

    Bison stew and fresh thyme in a light-colored bowl with a fork.

    Step 3. Stir before serving. Garnish with fresh thyme leaves and serve over mashed potatoes or rice. It can also be served on its own.

    Joss' Tips

    • Thaw Time: Keep in mind that many market vendors sell meat as frozen, so you may need to incorporate a couple days of thawing time into your meal planning. If you have time, thaw the meat in the fridge overnight. Thawing the packaged meat in a sink of cold water will help speed things up.
    • Elevated Slow Cooker Bison Stew: If you wish, you can sauté the mushrooms and onions in butter before adding them to the slow cooker but I personally like to keep this bison recipe quick and easy, dump dinner style.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Sides: Some great sides to serve with this stew include mashed potatoes, rice, green salad and Irish soda bread.
    • Drinks: A cold glass of Guinness or a Guinness cocktail is also an excellent drink addition for those that are of age!
    • Desserts: For dessert, try this blackberry galette with brie cheese, strawberry crumble or a simple strawberry and chocolate sundae.

    How to Store Leftover Bison Stew

    • Fridge: Cover and store any leftover bison stew in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
    • Freezer: Stew also freezes well for up to 3 months.

    Bison Stew FAQs

    What is the best way to cook bison?

    It will depend on the cut of bison, but for chuck roast, low and slow is the best way to cook it for tender, juicy results.

    How do you make bison meat tender?

    For bison cuts that are tougher, you should be braising the meat, which requires cooking it at a lower heat for a longer period of time with some liquid.

    Bison stew with fresh thyme in a light-colored bowl, mashed potatoes on the side.

    More Delish Bison Recipes to Try

    • Grilled bison ribeye steak sliced on cutting board with spices on the side.
      Grilled Bison Ribeye Steaks
    • Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan.
      Bison Brisket Nachos
    • Baked bison sliders in white casserole dish.
      Baked Bison Sliders
    • Bison meatballs with BBQ sauce and parsley.
      Bison Meatballs

    If you tried this Bison Stew Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Bison stew in bowl with fresh thyme.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Bison Stew

    This slow cooker bison stew with red wine and mushrooms makes a hearty, low effort weeknight dinner. Preparation time is only 10 minutes, and tossing everything in the slow cooker allows you to go about your day while your meal cooks.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 4 hours hours
    Total Time 4 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 376kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Slow cooker

    Ingredients

    • 2 pounds bison chuck roast cut into 1-inch cubes
    • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 ¼ teaspoons salt
    • ½ teaspoon pepper
    • 2 cups fresh button mushrooms cleaned and quartered
    • 2 cups yellow onions sliced
    • 1 tablespoon garlic minced
    • 1 cup vegetable broth
    • ½ cup red wine or balsamic or red wine vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon dried thyme leaves
    • fresh thyme leaves to garnish (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Mix the cubed bison with the flour, salt and pepper in a slow cooker.
    • Add the mushrooms, onions, garlic, vegetable broth, red wine, brown sugar and dried thyme. Mix to combine.
    • Cover with the lid and cook on high heat for 4 hours (or 6 to 8 hours on low) or until the meat is tender.
    • Stir before serving. Garnish with fresh thyme leaves and serve over mashed potatoes or rice.

    Notes

    • Sometimes you can find chuck roast already cubed, labeled as 'stew meat', or you can simply cut up a chuck roast yourself.
    • Cover and store any leftover stew in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
    • Stew also freezes well for up to 3 months.
    • Some great sides to serve with this stew include mashed potatoes, rice, green salad and Irish soda bread. A cold glass of Guinness or a Guinness cocktail is also an excellent addition for those that are of age!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 376kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 52g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 141mg | Sodium: 1094mg | Potassium: 1121mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 167IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 8mg

    Electric Skillet Asparagus Risotto

    April 5, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This electric skillet asparagus risotto with lemon zest is a bright, vegetarian side dish or main to serve at your Easter lunch or dinner. The addition of lemon zest and white wine is balanced out with the earthy, green asparagus and nutty Parmesan cheese.

    Risotto with lemon and asparagus in light blue bowl.

    If you're serving it as a side dish, it pairs well with various meats, such as electric skillet pork tenderloin, crock pot bison roast or vegetarian proteins.

    Electric skillet lamb chops are another great option because lamb is leaner, gamier (meaning they are grass-fed), and it is the most popular Easter symbol, matching the holiday.

    It also works as a filling main dish if you and your guests are vegetarian. As for dessert, I like to serve this plum pie crumble afterwards.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Electric skillet asparagus risotto ingredients labeled on wooden background.
    • green asparagus - Make sure to clean the asparagus well and trim the hard ends.
    • olive oil - Since we are using the olive oil for frying, pure olive oil will do. You do not need to splurge on extra virgin.
    • Arborio rice - Its creamy texture makes it perfect for risotto.
    • white wine - Such as a Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc. As the dish is simmering, the alcohol in the white wine is cooked out. However, if you are hesitant to use white wine, vegetable broth would be a great substitute. The asparagus risotto already calls for vegetable broth, so just replace the wine with ½ cup more.
    • vegetable broth - For this recipe, you need to keep the vegetable broth warmed on the side while cooking the rice, adding it to the dish periodically. While the rice slowly absorbs the liquid, this promotes the gradual release of starch into the dish.
    • butter - The butter will melt into the dish at the end, adding to the creamy texture and rich flavor.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Electric Skillet Risotto

    Asparagus cooking in electric skillet.

    Step 1. Cook the asparagus. Cut the asparagus into 3 parts and boil it in the electric skillet, until tender. Drain and reserve.

    Onion cooking in electric skillet.

    Step 2. Cook the onion. At 300ºF, add the olive oil and onion and cook until softened, stirring constantly.

    👩🏻‍🍳 Chef's Note #1: This old 12" ceramic electric skillet of mine might be stained but it still works great! If you keep up with the stains after each use, you can mostly avoid them. I show you exactly how to do that in my tutorial for how to clean electric skillet stains.

    Rice and onion in electric skillet.

    Step 3. Add rice. Turn the skillet up to 375ºF and add the rice. Let it sear for 1 minute and then stir in the wine and lemon juice. Cook until the alcohol evaporates, about 1 minute.

    Rice, onion and broth cooking in electric skillet.

    Step 4. Add broth. Add a few ladles of the warm broth and season with some salt and pepper. Lower the heat to 250ºF and cook for about 20 minutes in total.

    👩🏻‍🍳 Chef's Note #2 (Important): You will be adding more broth into the rice and mixing it in while it is cooking. Each time it looks like the liquid has been absorbed, you can add a ladle full (about ½ cup - you may not need all of the broth) and stir it in. Stir frequently so that the rice does not stick to the bottom. You will know the risotto is ready when the rice has a creamy and slightly firm but not crunchy texture.

    Risotto with asparagus, white wine, Parmesan and butter in electric skillet.

    Step 5. Stir in butter. Turn off the heat and stir in the reserved asparagus, butter and Parmesan cheese until the butter is melted. Season again if needed.

    Risotto with lemon zest and green asparagus in light blue bowl.

    Step 6. Serve. Top with lemon zest. Serve the asparagus risotto immediately.

    👩🏻‍🍳 Chef's Note #3: You might notice in my process shots that the 🍚 rice has a deeper golden color. This is simply because the vegetable broth I used was very dark in color. If you prefer a lighter color in the finished dish (as seen in the final photo: step 6), chicken broth is a great substitute and tends to be lighter in color.

    Top Tip

    Do not rinse the rice ahead of time or you'll remove the starch--which gives the risotto its signature creaminess.

    Serving Suggestions

    This asparagus risotto side dish can be matched with any meat such as this electric skillet pot roast and Greek lemon chicken thighs or seafood like my electric skillet salmon.

    For Easter, one of the best and most popular meats to serve is ham. While the risotto is light and acidic, roasted ham is salty and sweet with its Dijon mustard and brown sugar. This will give more varied flavors and textures that complement each other.

    To get a little extra tang, you can serve lemon wedges on the side. I also serve it with my spring white wine sangria.

    Storage & Reheating Instructions

    This asparagus risotto is easy to reheat if you have any leftovers. I wouldn't recommend freezing it. It can harden and when it is reheated, the texture of the rice will be grainy. Refrigeration is the best option and risotto lasts up to about 5 days, so that is plenty of time to eat it up.

    To reheat the risotto, you can:

    • Boil ¼ cup broth for each cup of risotto.
    • Add the risotto to the broth, and stir it for a few minutes or until mixed in.
    • If it is still too thick, add a little more broth or water.
    Asparagus risotto in bowl on white wooden backgroudn.

    More Electric Skillet Recipes to Try

    • Bananas Foster on black plate with ice cream.
      Easy Bananas Foster (Flambéed Bananas)
    • Veggie nachos on plate.
      Electric Skillet Veggie Nachos
    • Electric skillet French toast stuffed with Nutella and topped with sliced apples and icing sugar.
      Electric Skillet Stuffed French Toast
    • Glazed tofu with fresh herbs in bowl.
      Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu

    If you tried this 🍚 Electric Skillet Asparagus Risotto Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Risotto in bowl with asparagus and lemon zest.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Electric Skillet Asparagus Risotto

    This electric skillet asparagus risotto with lemon zest is a bright, vegetarian side dish or main to serve at your Easter lunch or dinner. It's also perfect for a fancier family meal.
    Course Main Course, Side Dish
    Cuisine American, Italian
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 32 minutes minutes
    Total Time 42 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 381kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet

    Ingredients

    • 1 bunch green asparagus ends trimmed
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 cup white or yellow onion chopped
    • 1 cup Arborio rice
    • ¼ cup white wine
    • 1 lemon juiced and zested
    • 4 cups vegetable broth warmed
    • 2 tablespoons butter
    • ¼ cup Parmesan cheese grated
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Boil some water in your electric skillet by turning the dial to 400ºF and covering with the lid.
    • Cut the asparagus into 3 parts. Cook in the boiling water until tender, about 5 to 10 minutes (depending on the thickness). Drain and reserve.
      1 bunch green asparagus
    • Heat the olive oil in the electric skillet at 300ºF. Add the onion and cook until softened, about 5 minutes, stirring constantly.
      2 tablespoons olive oil, 1 cup white or yellow onion
    • Turn the skillet up to 375ºF. Add the rice. Using a wooden spoon, mix it around with the oil and then let it sear for 1 minute.
      1 cup Arborio rice
    • Stir in the wine and lemon juice, and cook until the alcohol evaporates, about 1 minute.
      ¼ cup white wine, 1 lemon
    • Add a few ladles of the warm broth. Sprinkle with some salt and pepper. Give it a mix.
      4 cups vegetable broth
    • Lower temperature to 250ºF and cook for about 20 minutes in total - You will be adding more broth into the rice and mixing it in while it is cooking. Each time it looks like the liquid has been absorbed, you can add a ladle full (about ½ cup - You may not need all of the broth) and stir it in. Stir frequently so that the rice does not stick to the bottom. You will know it's ready when the rice has a creamy and slightly firm but not crunchy texture.
    • Turn off the heat and stir in the reserved asparagus, butter and Parmesan cheese until the butter is melted. Check the seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if needed.
      2 tablespoons butter, ¼ cup Parmesan cheese
    • Top with lemon zest. Serve immediately.

    Notes

    • Tip: Do not rinse the rice ahead of time or you'll remove the starch--which gives the risotto its signature creaminess.
    • Leftover storage: If you have any leftover risotto, I wouldn't recommend freezing it. It can harden and when it is reheated, the texture of the rice will be grainy. Refrigeration is the best option and risotto lasts up to about 5 days, so that is plenty of time to eat it up.
    • To reheat the risotto, you can:
      1. Boil ¼ cup broth for each cup of risotto.
      2. Add the risotto to the broth, and stir it for a few minutes or until mixed in.
      3. If it is still too thick, add a little more broth or water.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 381kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 1100mg | Potassium: 350mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1582IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 98mg | Iron: 5mg

    Kimchi Hot Dogs

    March 29, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Grilled hot dogs in crispy, toasted buns are topped with a kimchi slaw-style mixture of mayo and gochujang along with other vegetables for different textures. Just, yum! You can enjoy these Korean-inspired loaded kimchi hot dogs at home with just a few ingredients and under 20 minutes of your time.

    Grilled hot dogs with kimchi topping and black sesame sides on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Kimchi on Hot Dogs? Yes, Actually

    It might sound weird to put kimchi on hot dogs, but there are even more unique toppings for hot dogs out there, like this Filipino banana ketchup recipe. You can elevate your hot dogs into a gourmet delight with this recipe.

    Kimchi goes especially well with pork (like in this kimchi and bacon fried rice recipe), beef and other proteins, so don't knock it till you try it!

    Kimchi Hot Dog Ingredients

    In this kimchi hot dog recipe, diced kimchi is mixed with mayo, gochujang and carrots, giving you a creamy, spicy, umami topping with a bit of crunch.

    Kimchi hot dog ingredients labeled.
    • mayo - Mayo is used to make the creamy, slaw-style topping.
    • gochujang - A spicy, umami, Asian condiment made from red chilies.
    • lime juice - Freshly squeezed.
    • kimchi - You can find authentic kimchi at the supermarket, Asian markets or you could even make your own fermented kimchi.
    • carrots - Try to find large, bright colored, firm carrots as they will be shredded for the hot dog topping.
    • wieners - Since these Asian flavors are regularly paired with spicy pork or beef, both beef and pork wieners, or a mix of the two, will match well with these Korean ingredients. For vegetarians, the most popular choices are tofu, lentil, or veggie dogs. Just make sure the kimchi you buy is vegetarian as well.
    • hot dog buns - For something a little different than your standard hot dog bun, I recommend a brioche hot dog bun. If you cannot find this roll, a regular hot dog bun or hoagie roll will also work.
    • green onions and toasted black sesame seeds - For a garnish.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Kimchi Hot Dogs

    Gochujang mayo in bowl with whisk.

    Step 1. Whisk. To make the topping, in a medium bowl, whisk the mayo, gochujang and lime juice together.

    Kimchi hot dog topping in bowl.

    Step 2. Add the Vegetables. Add the kimchi, carrots and green onions and stir to coat. Reserve.

    Wieners on the outdoor grill.

    Step 3. Grill the Wieners. Grill the wieners over medium heat for about 5 to 7 minutes, turning once, until they are warmed through and have grill marks.

    Hot dog buns on the outdoor grill.

    Step 4. Toast the Hot Dog Buns. Grill the hot dog buns face down for about 30 seconds to 1 minute, until golden and crispy.

    Hot dogs with creamy, kimchi topping, black sesame seeds and sliced green onion curls.

    Step 5. Assemble & Serve. Place the grilled wieners in the toasted buns and top with the kimchi mixture. Garnish with green onions and black sesame seeds. Serve the kimchi hot dogs!

    Pro Tips

    • Poke some holes in the wieners. Try poking a few holes in the wieners before grilling so that steam is let out while they're cooking, helping to avoid a burst weenie.
    • Use indirect heat to keep the wieners warm. Cooked wieners can be kept warm on the indirect heat side of the grill until ready for serving.
    • Drain the kimchi well. One tip for avoiding a watery slaw is to drain the kimchi really well before adding it to the mixture. This way the topping will have the best texture and full flavor for these kimchi hot dogs.
    • Squeeze the moisture out of the shredded carrots. Also, you can put the shredded carrots in a clean paper towel and gently squeeze the moisture out before using.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do you have to toast the hot dog buns?

    Yes, if you want to avoid biting into a wet, soggy bun. With this saucy topping, regular hot dog buns can get soggy and are in need of a sturdy base. By toasting your hot dog buns, it gives a more solid base and helps keep the toppings from falling out of the bun.

    More importantly, since the kimchi mixture is incorporated in different liquids, it is going to be wet. Toasting the inside will keep the liquid from saturating the bun and create a more desirable texture.

    How to store the leftovers?

    Any leftover, creamy kimchi topping can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 5 days in an airtight container. Leftover wieners should also be refrigerated and will be good for up to 3 to 4 days.

    What side dishes go with kimchi hot dogs?

    One of the best sides for this summer BBQ dish is grilled corn. Check out my tutorial for how to grill corn on the cob. You can also serve this spicy kimchi potato salad or grilled mango kabobs.

    Hot dogs with creamy, kimchi topping, black sesame seeds and sliced green onions.

    More Delicious Kimchi Recipes

    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi carbonara in a bowl.
      Kimchi Carbonara
    • Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
      Kimchi Dumplings
    • Kimchi chowder with corn in bowl.
      Kimchi Chowder

    If you tried this 🌭 Kimchi Hot Dogs Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi hot dogs with small bowls of toppings on serving tray.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Hot Dogs

    These kimchi hot dogs consist of grilled wieners in crispy, toasted buns, topped with a slaw style mixture of mayo and gochujang along with kimchi and other vegetables for different textures. They are flavorful and delish!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, German, Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Total Time 16 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 459kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Outdoor grill

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup mayo
    • 3 tablespoons gochujang
    • 1 tablespoon lime juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 cup kimchi drained from the brine and diced
    • 1 cup carrots grated
    • 1 cup green onions chopped
    • 4 wieners
    • 4 hot dog buns sliced open
    • green onions sliced thinly--to garnish
    • toasted black sesame seeds to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, whisk the mayo, gochujang and lime juice together.
      ½ cup mayo, 3 tablespoons gochujang, 1 tablespoon lime juice
    • Add the kimchi, carrots and green onions and stir to coat. Reserve.
      1 cup kimchi, 1 cup carrots, 1 cup green onions
    • Grill the wieners over medium heat for about 5 to 7 minutes, turning once, until they are warmed through and have grill marks.
      4 wieners
    • Grill the hot dog buns face down for about 30 seconds to 1 minute, until golden and crispy.
      4 hot dog buns
    • Place the grilled wieners in the toasted buns and top with the kimchi mixture. Garnish with the thinly sliced green onions and black sesame seeds. Serve!

    Notes

    • Try poking a few holes in the wieners before grilling so that steam is let out while they're cooking, helping to avoid a burst weenie.
    • Since these Asian flavors are regularly paired with spicy pork or beef, both beef and pork wieners, or a mix of the two, will match well with these Korean ingredients. For vegetarians, the most popular choices are tofu, lentil, or veggie dogs. Just make sure the kimchi you buy is vegetarian as well.
    • For something a little different than your standard hot dog bun, I recommend a brioche hot dog bun. If you cannot find this roll, a regular hot dog bun or hoagie roll will also work.
    • Cooked wieners can be kept warm on the indirect heat side of the grill until ready for serving.
    • One tip for avoiding a watery slaw is to drain the kimchi really well before adding it to the mixture. Also, you can put the shredded carrots in a clean paper towel and gently squeeze the moisture out before using.
    • Any leftover, creamy kimchi topping can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 5 days in an airtight container.
    • Leftover wieners should also be refrigerated and will be good for up to 3 to 4 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 459kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 867mg | Potassium: 387mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 5666IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 115mg | Iron: 4mg

    Easy Pickled Eggs

    March 22, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    These pickled eggs with garlic are a yummy, savory snack. They require only a few ingredients and use an easy no-canning method. I included instructions and tips for boiling and peeling the eggs as well.

    Pickled eggs in a glass jar with garlic cloves on the side.

    They are commonly served in pubs and taverns but I love to have them on hand at home. I make these almost every week for my family; we go through a lot of pickled eggs! The taste and texture is perfect.

    Besides eating them as a snack I also like to use them as an appetizer and serve them sliced on charcuterie boards with my homemade pickled sausage when having guests over.

    Check out more of my sweet and savory snack recipes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥚Ingredients

    Pickled egg ingredients prepped on wooden board.
    • large eggs - They can be brown, white, farm eggs or store-bought...whatever you have on hand. A whole carton of large eggs should fit into a 1 quart jar.
    • garlic - Peeled and slightly crushed. Garlic enhances the flavor of the pickled eggs and I like eating them out of the jar but you can leave it out if you don't like the taste.
    • bay leaves - Bay leaves add more depth of flavor and can act as natural preservatives.
    • white vinegar - For a simple variation you can replace some of the white vinegar with balsamic vinegar or apple cider vinegar to give the eggs some color and slightly different flavor.
    • sugar - I use a touch of white granulated sugar for better flavor but don't worry; it's not noticeably sweet.
    • pickling salt - Not to be confused with pickling spice.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    📝How to Make Pickled Eggs

    Eggs in saucepan with water.

    Step 1. Place the eggs in a saucepan. Add just enough water to the pot to cover the eggs by an inch.

    Eggs in saucepan with lid.

    Step 2. Bring the water to a boil. Once boiling, cover with a lid and remove from heat. Let sit for 12-15 minutes, until hard-boiled.

    Eggs in a bowl of ice water.

    Step 3. Drain the eggs and transfer them to a bowl of ice and water. Let them chill for at least 15 minutes.

    Shelled eggs on a plate.

    Step 4. Shell the eggs.

    Jar with shelled eggs, garlic and bay leaves.

    Step 5. Add the garlic cloves, bay leaves and eggs to a sterilized 1 quart jar.

    Saucepan with pickling brine and wooden spoon.

    Step 6. Add the vinegar, sugar and salt to a saucepan and bring to a boil. Stir until the sugar and salt is dissolved.

    Pickled eggs in a jar with brine pouring into the jar.

    Step 7. Remove from heat and ladle the liquid into the jar over the eggs, making sure they are completely covered.

    Pickled eggs in a jar.

    Step 8. Let cool for 30 minutes to 1 hour.

    Pickled eggs in a jar with a lid.

    Step 9. Seal the jar and transfer it to the refrigerator. Let them sit in the refrigerator for at least 24 hours before eating. The pickled eggs must stay refrigerated for food safety purposes.

    Pickled eggs in a glass jar with garlic cloves and bay leaves on the side.

    👩🏻‍🍳Joss' Tips

    • For easier peeling of the egg shells, here are some tips:
      • Older eggs are easier to peel than fresh eggs due to pH level.
      • Don't skip the chilling in ice water step because this helps make eggs easier to peel by shocking them.
      • Add a little baking soda or vinegar to the boiling water.
      • I crack the eggs all over and roll them around a bit to loosen everything. Then, I start at the bottom of the egg and peel them in the water. The water can help release the membrane that is in between the egg and the shell.
    • If you are pressed for time, you can buy pre-cooked/peeled eggs but keep in mind that it's cheaper to make them from scratch and you can support local by purchasing farm eggs.
    • For a spicy version, add 1 or 2 Thai red chili peppers to the jar or some red pepper flakes.

    🌡️Storage

    The pickled eggs must stay refrigerated for food safety purposes. They should be eaten within 3 to 4 months for best results.

    ❓Recipe FAQs

    How long should eggs be pickled before eating?

    Let them sit in the refrigerator for at least 24 hours before eating so they can soak up the delicious vinegar flavor and tang. Wait longer for stronger flavor.

    Why are my pickled eggs rubbery?

    This could simply be due to the length of time the eggs are in the brine. The white part of the egg can also become rubbery from overcooking it.

    What causes botulism in pickled eggs?

    A lack of refrigeration can cause botulism in pickled eggs, so always keep them in the fridge.

    Pickled eggs in a glass jar with sliced egg and garlic cloves on the side.

    ❤️More Egg Recipes You Will Love

    • Korean kimchi scrambled eggs in pan.
      Kimchi Scrambled Eggs
    • Deviled eggs with kimchi, pickled veggies and cilantro on parchment.
      Kimchi Deviled Eggs
    • Hamburger scrambled eggs in cast iron pan.
      Hamburger Scrambled Eggs
    • Chorizo and eggs on plate with fork.
      Mexican Chorizo and Eggs

    If you tried this 🥚 Easy Pickled Eggs Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Pickled eggs in jar and sliced open in a bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Easy Pickled Eggs

    These easy pickled eggs with garlic are a yummy, savory snack. They require only a few ingredients and no canning is required. They have a perfect taste and texture!
    Course Snack
    Cuisine American, German
    Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 14 minutes minutes
    Total Time 29 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 eggs
    Calories 77kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 1 Quart jar

    Ingredients

    • 12 large eggs
    • 3 cloves garlic peeled and slightly crushed
    • 2 bay leaves
    • 2 cups white vinegar
    • 1 tablespoon sugar
    • 2 teaspoons pickling salt
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Place the eggs in a saucepan. Add just enough water to the pot to cover the eggs by an inch.
      12 large eggs
      Brown eggs in saucepan.
    • Bring the water to a boil. Once boiling, cover with a lid and remove from heat. Let sit for 12 minutes, until hard-boiled.
      Eggs in saucepan with lid.
    • Drain the eggs and transfer them to a bowl of ice and water. Let them chill for 15 minutes.
      Eggs in a bowl of ice water.
    • Add the garlic cloves and bay leaves to a sterilized 1 quart jar. Shell the eggs and place them in the jar.
      3 cloves garlic, 2 bay leaves
      Jar with shelled eggs, garlic and bay leaves.
    • Add the vinegar, sugar and salt to a saucepan and bring to a boil. Stir until the sugar and salt is dissolved.
      2 cups white vinegar, 1 tablespoon sugar, 2 teaspoons pickling salt
      Saucepan with pickling brine and wooden spoon.
    • Remove from heat and ladle the liquid into the jar over the eggs, making sure they are completely covered.
      Pickled eggs in a jar.
    • Let cool for 30 minutes to 1 hour.
      Pickled eggs in a jar.
    • Seal the jar and transfer it to the refrigerator. Let them sit in the refrigerator for at least 24 hours before eating. The pickled eggs must stay refrigerated for food safety purposes.
      Pickled eggs in a jar with a lid.

    Notes

    • For a simple variation you can replace some of the white vinegar with balsamic vinegar or apple cider vinegar to give the eggs some color and slightly different flavor.
    • If you are pressed for time, you can buy pre-cooked/peeled eggs but keep in mind that it's cheaper to make them from scratch and you can support local by purchasing farm eggs.
    • For a spicy version, add 1 or 2 Thai red chili peppers to the jar or some red pepper flakes.
    • Let them sit in the refrigerator for at least 24 hours before eating so they can soak up the delicious vinegar flavor and tang. Wait longer for stronger flavor.
    • The pickled eggs must stay refrigerated for food safety purposes. They should be eaten within 3 to 4 months for best results.
    • Egg Peeling Tips:
      • Older eggs are easier to peel than fresh eggs due to pH level.
      • Don't skip the chilling in ice water step because this helps make eggs easier to peel by shocking them.
      • Add a little baking soda or vinegar to the boiling water.
      • I crack the eggs all over and roll them around a bit to loosen everything. Then, I start at the bottom of the egg and peel them in the water. The water can help release the membrane that is in between the egg and the shell.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 77kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 186mg | Sodium: 459mg | Potassium: 69mg | Fiber: 0.004g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 271IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

    Electric Skillet English Muffins

    March 15, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    These homemade English muffins are made in an electric skillet and piled with ham and cheese for a hot, filling breakfast or lunch that serves your entire family.

    English muffin sandwiches stacked on plate on wooden background.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    ❤️ Skip the Store With These Homemade English Muffins

    • They make great hot and cold leftovers for breakfast or a protein-packed lunch.
    • You can let everyone customize their sandwiches with their favorite condiments. Instead of ham and cheese, try them with peach freezer jam or homemade strawberry compote.
    • You can bake them wherever you can take your electric skillet--including on your camping trip.
    • English muffins are great for on-the-go because they don't require silverware. Grab a sandwich while you're standing and talking or throw them into your kids' lunches.
    • Using an electric skillet for this breakfast is easy and doesn't seem to heat up your home like an oven would.

    🧂 Ingredients

    English muffin ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • sugar - Yeast doesn't need added sugar to do its job but a touch of it helps to increase its activity. It also enhances flavor and helps to achieve a golden crust.
    • active dry yeast - Active dry yeast is dissolved in warm water or milk to wake it up. Quick/instant yeast, on the other hand, can be mixed straight into the flour. Make sure you use the active dry yeast in this recipe.
    • cornmeal - Or semolina.
    • ham and cheese slices - This is optional, if you want to serve them as sandwiches. The fillings can be customized.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🔪 How to Make Electric Skillet English Muffins

    Yeast and milk mixture in bowl.

    Step 1. Pour the warm milk into a small bowl. Add the sugar, mix well and then stir in the dry yeast. Let it rest for 10 minutes. It should be foamy.

    English muffin dough in bowl with wooden spoon.

    Step 2. Pour the yeast mixture into a bigger bowl. Add the salt and butter and mix with a wooden spoon. Add the flour and continue mixing with the wooden spoon until the dough starts separating from the sides of the bowl.

    English muffin dough ball in buttered bowl.

    Step 3. Knead with clean hands until a soft and smooth ball of dough forms. Grease a different bowl and place the dough in it. Cover with plastic wrap. Let it sit for around 1 hour, or until dough doubles in size.

    Chef's Note: The dough should be moist but not super sticky. If it's overly sticky, you can add a touch of flour.

    Dough ball punched down in bowl.

    Step 4. Punch the dough down.

    English muffin dough rounds on wax paper lined sheet pan.

    Step 5. Dust a clean surface with cornmeal or semolina to help avoid sticking. Roll out the dough until it's around ½ inch thick. Cut the dough out into circles with a round cookie cutter (around 3 to 4 inches in diameter).

    English muffin dough rounds on wax paper lined sheet pan, sprinkled with cornmeal.

    Step 6. Place the circles onto wax paper and sprinkle the tops with cornmeal. Press it in gently. Cover with a damp towel and let them rise again for 30 more minutes.

    Golden brown English muffins in electric skillet.

    Step 7. Fry in the electric skillet, covered, at 300ºF for about 12 minutes on each side, or until lightly browned. Transfer to a baking rack to cool.

    Chef's Note: If you notice the bottoms darkening too quickly, turn the electric skillet temperature down a touch.

    English muffin sandwiches with ham and cheese on plate.

    Step 8. To serve the electric skillet English muffins, cut them in half and add ham, cheese and any desired condiments.

    🍽 Serving Suggestions

    English muffins are flat rolls that look more like biscuits than muffins. People frequently eat them for breakfast with jelly and butter or eggs, cheese and ham. The soft interior and mildly crusty exterior provide the perfect texture for both sweet and savory ingredients.

    If you have leftover English muffins, experiment with various condiments and toppings, such as peanut butter, orange marmalade or mashed avocados.

    Serve them with both cold and hot sides, such as a pasta salad, African peanut butter soup or hemp salad for a fuller meal. Complementary drinks include mimosas, iced tea, orange juice and classic lemonade.

    🌡️ Storage

    • Eat them within a few days for maximum freshness.
    • To store properly, cover your muffins with plastic wrap or place them in an airtight container.
    • They can be stored at room temperature for a few days or in the fridge to last longer.
    • They can also be frozen for up to 3 months. Store the toppings separately.

    ♨️ Reheating Instructions

    Thaw frozen English muffins at room temperature and reheat them in the toaster, oven or directly in the electric skillet to crisp them up again. They can also be quickly reheated in the microwave from frozen.

    English muffin sandwiches with ham and cheese, stacked on purple plate.

    📖 More Electric Skillet Recipes to Try

    • Risotto in bowl with asparagus and lemon zest.
      Electric Skillet Asparagus Risotto
    • BBQ buffalo wings in dish with sauce on the side.
      37 Easy and Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes
    • Uncut brownies in a pan in the electric skillet.
      Electric Skillet Brownies
    • Glazed tofu with fresh herbs in bowl.
      Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu

    If you tried this Electric Skillet English Muffins Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    English muffin sandwiches stacked on purple plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Electric Skillet English Muffins

    These homemade, electric skillet English muffins piled with ham and cheese make a hot, filling meal for breakfast or lunch that serves your entire family.
    Course Bread, Breakfast, Main Course
    Cuisine American, British
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Resting Time 1 hour hour 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 2 hours hours 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 English muffins
    Calories 226kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet
    • round cookie cutter
    • Rolling pin

    Ingredients

    • 1 ¾ cups warm milk
    • 2 tablespoons sugar
    • 2 teaspoons active dry yeast
    • 1 ½ teaspoons salt
    • 3 tablespoons butter melted
    • 4 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • cornmeal or semolina as needed
    • ham and cheese slices to serve
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Pour the warm milk into a small bowl. Add the sugar, mix well and then stir in the dry yeast. Let it rest for 10 minutes. It should be foamy.
      1 ¾ cups warm milk, 2 tablespoons sugar, 2 teaspoons active dry yeast
    • Pour the yeast mixture into a bigger bowl. Add the salt and butter and mix with a wooden spoon.
      1 ½ teaspoons salt, 3 tablespoons butter
    • Add the flour and continue mixing with the wooden spoon until the dough starts separating from the sides of the bowl.
      4 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • Knead with clean hands until a soft and smooth ball of dough forms. If it's overly sticky, you can add a touch of flour.
    • Grease a different bowl and place the dough in it. Cover with plastic wrap.
    • Let it sit for around 1 hour, or until the dough doubles in size. Punch the dough down.
    • Dust a clean surface with cornmeal or semolina to help avoid sticking. Roll out the dough until it's around ½ inch thick.
    • Cut the dough out into circles with a round cookie cutter (around 3 to 4 inches in diameter).
    • Place the circles onto wax paper and sprinkle the tops with cornmeal. Cover with a damp towel and let them rise again for 30 more minutes.
    • Fry in the electric skillet, covered, at 300ºF for about 10 to 12 minutes on each side, or until lightly browned. Transfer to a baking rack to cool.
    • To serve, cut in half and add ham, cheese and any desired condiments.

    Notes

    • Note on nutrition info: Nutrition information is for the English muffin only. It does not include the cornmeal, ham and cheese as those are optional and it is too difficult to determine the amount of cornmeal on each muffin.
    • Storage: Eat them within a few days for maximum freshness. To store properly, cover your muffins with plastic wrap or place them in an airtight container. They can be stored at room temperature for a few days or in the fridge to last longer. They can also be frozen for up to 3 months. Store the toppings separately.
    • Thawing and reheating: Thaw frozen English muffins at room temperature and reheat them in the toaster, oven or directly in the electric skillet to crisp them up again. They can also be quickly reheated in the microwave from frozen.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 328mg | Potassium: 109mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 145IU | Vitamin C: 0.002mg | Calcium: 52mg | Iron: 2mg

    Easy Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip

    March 8, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This creamy buffalo chicken dip with shredded chicken, three cheeses and buffalo sauce is a classic comfort food, perfect for gatherings or simply snacking at home. It's easy to prepare and serve this dip using a slow cooker. Prep time for this recipe is only 10 minutes; simply combine the ingredients and let the crockpot do the rest!

    Buffalo chicken dip on wooden serving board and tortilla chips on the side.

    This slow cooker buffalo chicken dip makes an easy and convenient option for parties and potlucks, and you will likely be coming back to this recipe for years to come!

    If you like slow cooker recipes, I think you'll also enjoy this bison stew and Mexican vegetable soup.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Slow cooker buffalo chicken dip ingredients labeled.
    • cream cheese - Brick style.
    • chicken breast - Pre-cooked and shredded. For a more convenient and affordable ingredient option, you could choose to use canned chunk chicken instead of fresh chicken breast or rotisserie chicken. If you have leftover chicken, this is a great way to use it up.
    • buffalo sauce - A buttery hot sauce. Frank's is very popular and delicious but store-brand is usually cheaper.
    • sour cream - For a bit of tang.
    • ranch dressing - Buffalo sauce and ranch are a classic combination.
    • fresh garlic - Garlic adds a robust, savory flavor that elevates the taste of a dip. If you're not a fan, leave it out.
    • fresh jalapeños - I seed them so they aren't as hot and for a smoother texture in the dip. You can replace them with canned green chiles if you have some on hand. Omit the jalapeños to tone the spice down.
    • cheddar cheese - It has a sharp flavor that goes well with the Monterey. Use freshly grated cheddar for best melting results.
    • Monterey Jack cheese - It's known for its smooth creamy texture and mild flavor which goes great in a cheese dip.
    • Garnishes: Green onions and chili powder.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip

    Slow cooker filled with buffalo chicken dip ingredients.

    Step #1. Add all of the dip ingredients to a slow cooker. Stir to combine.

    Buffalo chicken dip in slow cooker.

    Step #2. Place the lid on and cook on low heat for about 2 hours, until it's hot and the cheeses are fully melted.

    Buffalo chicken dip in white dish with chips on the side.

    Step #3. Sprinkle with green onions and a bit of chili powder. Serve!

    Top Tip

    I like to stir the mixture occasionally as it's cooking to help it combine.

    Serving Suggestions

    Buffalo chicken dip on a tortilla chip.

    The original buffalo chicken wings were served with celery sticks so it would make sense to use them for dipping. Some other ideas for dipping are:

    • tortilla chips
    • pita chips
    • crackers
    • pretzel bites
    • carrots
    • you could also serve it with your preferred brand of hot sauce or homemade hot sauce on the side for a spicier dip

    Recipe FAQs

    What are the origins of buffalo chicken?

    The dip is a spinoff of the original Buffalo Chicken Wings, which were served for the first time at the Anchor Bar in Buffalo, New York in 1964 by co-owner Teressa Bellissimo (she owned the bar with her husband Frank). They quickly became a hit and since then have become a staple at American gatherings, especially on football game days.

    Many variations of buffalo chicken have been created since, which is where the inspiration came for this dip. This variation still contains chicken and the famous, spicy buffalo sauce, but in a cheesy dip form, like my bison cheeseburger dip.

    How long do leftovers last in the fridge?

    This dip will store well covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days.

    How do you reheat the leftovers?

    Buffalo chicken dip can be reheated in a saucepan over medium-low heat on the stove. If it's thickened up too much, add a touch of milk and whisk it in while it's warming up.

    Can you freeze it?

    Yes, you can freeze leftover dip for up to 3 months, although keep in mind that the texture may be slightly different. Make sure to cool it completely and store in an airtight container.

    Buffalo chicken dip in dish with small spoon.

    More Delicious Dip Recipes

    • Red wine cheese dip in mini slow cooker.
      Red Wine & Cheese Dip (for Mini Slow Cooker)
    • Honey dill sauce in small jar with mini serving spoon.
      Simple Honey Dill Sauce
    • Dill dip in serving bowl with fresh dill on top.
      Homemade Dill Veggie Dip
    • Beer cheese dip in saucepan with paprika and thyme.
      Beer Cheese Dip

    If you tried this 🌶🧀 Easy Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Buffalo chicken dip with green onions in serving dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip

    This creamy, buffalo chicken dip with shredded chicken, three cheeses and buffalo sauce is a classic comfort food, perfect for gatherings or simply snacking at home. It's easy to prepare and serve this dip using a slow cooker.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8
    Calories 331kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Slow cooker

    Ingredients

    For the Dip

    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • 2 cups cooked chicken breast shredded
    • ⅔ cup buffalo sauce
    • ⅓ cup sour cream
    • ⅓ cup ranch dressing
    • 1 clove garlic minced
    • 3 tablespoons jalapeños seeded and diced
    • 1 cup cheddar cheese shredded
    • 1 cup Monterey Jack cheese shredded

    Toppings

    • 2 green onions sliced
    • chili powder
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Add all of the dip ingredients to a slow cooker. Stir to combine.
    • Place the lid on and cook on low heat for about 2 hours, until it's hot and the cheeses are fully melted. Stir the mixture occasionally to help it combine.
    • Sprinkle with green onions and a bit of chili powder.
    • Serve with tortilla chips, crackers, veggies, etc.

    Notes

    • Spice level: You can replace the jalapeños with canned green chiles if you have some on hand. Omit the jalapeños to tone the spice down a little.
    • Fridge Storage: This dip will store well covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Freezer Storage: You could also freeze portions of this dip for up to 3 months, although keep in mind that the texture may be slightly different. Make sure to cool it completely and store in an airtight container.
    • Reheating: It can be reheated in a saucepan over medium-low heat on the stove. If it's thickened up too much, add a touch of milk and whisk it in while it's warming up.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 331kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 999mg | Potassium: 183mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 762IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 252mg | Iron: 1mg

    Grasshopper Pie

    March 1, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    This grasshopper pie is a tasty chocolate-mint frozen dessert inspired by the classic after dinner cocktail drink. The recipe is very straightforward with about only 15 minutes of hands-on prep time and no baking required.

    Grasshopper pie in ceramic pie plate.

    This dessert is typically served in the spring for St. Patrick's Day or Easter and is named after its green color. It's an easy option for any event because you can prepare it ahead of time and it can stay frozen until you are ready to serve.

    In my version of this recipe, I use peppermint extract and mint Oreo cookies to make it a non-alcoholic treat with a similar fresh flavor.

    It is common to use marshmallows in the preparation of the classic but this version is made without marshmallows, using cream cheese instead and to me it tastes even better.

    Some more of my fresh and fun spring recipes you might want to check out are this white sangria and a step by step recipe for how to make homemade lemonade.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Grasshopper Pie?

    Grasshopper pie is a green-colored, mint-flavored, no-bake dessert named after the Grasshopper cocktail. The grasshopper cocktail is typically prepared using crème de menthe liqueur.

    Ingredients

    Grasshopper pie ingredients prepped and labeled on light background.
    • Oreo baking crumbs - These are basically just crumbled Oreos without the filling. (Check out easy substitutions below.)
    • brick cream cheese - It needs to be softened first. To soften the cream cheese, you can place it (without packaging) in a bowl in the microwave for 20 seconds or place the package in warm water for about 20 minutes.
    • green food coloring - The liquid and gel coloring both work in this recipe.
    • whipped topping - Such as Cool Whip or you can whip your own heavy cream.
    • mint Oreo cookies - Mint Oreo cookies can be hard to find depending on where you live, but there are easy ways to substitute them (see options below).

    *See recipe card for full ingredients and amounts.

    Ingredient Substitutions

    • Mint Oreos: I know the mint Oreos can be difficult to find at times. If you can't find them, you can definitely use regular Oreos instead. Another fun substitute would be thin mint cookies or something similar. This obviously depends on your individual preference so feel free to experiment!
    • Oreo Baking Crumbs: It looks like these, along with the premade crusts, have been discontinued (so sad), but if enough people email the company, they might bring them back! Chocolate baking crumbs are the best substitute. You can also process regular Oreos (not Double Stuf) in a food processor until you have crumbs.

    How to Make Grasshopper Pie

    Oreo crust in pie plate.

    Step 1. Prepare the crust. Combine the baking crumbs with the butter. Press the mixture into a 9" pie plate with a fork. Set aside.

    Grasshopper pie filling in bowl.

    Step 2. Make the pie filling. In a large bowl, beat the cream cheese with an electric mixer on medium speed for 2 minutes. Beat in the sweetened condensed milk, until smooth. Add the food coloring and peppermint extract and mix well.

    Chef's Note: Scrape down the sides of the bowl when needed.

    Grasshopper pie filling in pie dish.

    Step 3. Freeze. Crumble 12 of the cookies and fold them into the cream cheese mixture. Fold in the whipped topping. Spoon the mixture over the prepared crust. Cover and freeze until firm, for at least 4 hours or overnight.

    Slice of grasshopper pie on small dessert plate and a spoon on the side.

    Step 4. Serve. Crumble the remaining 4 cookies on top of the pie. Slice and serve the grasshopper pie!

    Joss' Tips

    • Thaw the whipped cream. If using a pre-frozen whipped topping like Cool Whip, be sure to thaw it in the refrigerator first or you'll have a difficult time blending it into the cream cheese mixture.
    • Don't over-fold. Try not to over-fold the whipped topping into the cream cheese because this will actually start to deflate it and the end result won't be as fluffy.
    • Garnish. You could garnish your pie with a mint sprig in addition to the crushed cookies to make it more aesthetically pleasing. You might even want to top it with peppermint flavored whipped cream to be extra festive.
    • Food paint trick. If I can't find mint Oreos and I'm making this for St. Patrick's Day, one of my tricks is to 'paint' green food coloring onto the white parts of the regular Oreo cookies with a food decorating brush.

    Storage

    • For long-time storage, place the grasshopper pie in a large freezer bag and into the freezer.
    • It is best if eaten within 3 months of freezing.

    Grasshopper Pie FAQs

    Why do they call it grasshopper pie?

    It's named after the grasshopper cocktail, which is green and chocolate-mint flavored.

    Can kids have grasshopper pie?

    If they're not scared off by the name, they would likely enjoy it. It doesn't contain alcohol and is delicious. My kids love this dessert!

    Can you store it in the fridge?

    This grasshopper pie is a frozen dessert so I wouldn't recommend storing it in the fridge.

    Grasshopper pie in ceramic pie plate with crushed Oreo cookies on the side.

    ❤️ Related St. Patrick's Day Recipes to Consider

    • Beef black beer stew on black plate with fresh dill.
      St. Patrick's Day Beef and Guinness Stew
    • Cabbage and bacon in bowl.
      Irish Slow Cooker Cabbage & Bacon
    • Irish coffee in coffee mug with 4 leaf clover, whipped cream and chocolate curls.
      Irish Coffee Cocktail
    • Shepherd's pie with a slice missing.
      How to Make Shepherd's Pie (With Lamb)

    I make this Mint Grasshopper Pie Recipe every St. Patrick's Day for my family and they look forward to it every year. If you tried it or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grasshopper pie in white pie plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Grasshopper Pie

    This grasshopper pie is a tasty chocolate-mint frozen dessert inspired by the classic after dinner cocktail drink. The recipe is very straightforward with about only 15 minutes of hands-on prep time and no baking required. It's typically served in the spring for St. Patrick's Day or Easter.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Freezing Time 4 hours hours
    Total Time 4 hours hours 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Calories 544kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Pie plate

    Ingredients

    • 1 ¼ cups chocolate cookie crumbs or Oreo baking crumbs if you can find them
    • ¼ cup butter melted
    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened (1 brick)
    • 14 ounces sweetened condensed milk one can
    • 20 drops green food coloring or more if you prefer a richer color
    • 1 teaspoon peppermint extract
    • 16 mint Oreo cookies or regular Oreos
    • 2 cups whipped topping such as Cool Whip
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • To prepare the crust: Combine the baking crumbs with the butter. Press the mixture into a 9" pie plate with a fork. Set aside.
      1 ¼ cups chocolate cookie crumbs, ¼ cup butter
    • In a large bowl, beat the cream cheese with an electric mixer on medium speed for 2 minutes. Slowly add the sweetened condensed milk and continue beating, until smooth. Add the food coloring and peppermint extract and mix well.
      8 ounces cream cheese, 14 ounces sweetened condensed milk, 20 drops green food coloring, 1 teaspoon peppermint extract
    • Crumble 12 of the cookies (larger chunks are ideal--not crumbs). Fold them into the cream cheese mixture. Fold in the whipped topping.
      2 cups whipped topping
    • Spoon the mixture over the prepared crust. Cover and freeze until firm, for at least 4 hours or overnight.
    • Crumble the remaining 4 cookies on top of the pie. Slice and serve!

    Notes

    • Storage: Keep the dessert frozen for up to 3 months. Place the pie dish in a large freezer bag.
    • Pie Plate: You can use a 9" ceramic or glass pie dish or simply purchase a disposable tin pie pan from any grocery store.
    • Softening the Cream Cheese: To soften the cream cheese you can place it in a bowl in the microwave for 20 seconds or place the package in warm water for about 20 minutes.
    • Mint Oreos Substitute: If you can't find mint Oreos you can use regular Oreos instead. Another fun substitute for the mint Oreo cookies for the filling of the cake would be thin mint cookies or something similar.
    • Chocolate Cookie Crumbs: Chocolate baking crumbs are a good substitute. You can also process Oreos in a food processor until you have crumbs.
    • Food Paint: If I can't find mint Oreos and I'm making this for St. Patrick's Day, one of my tricks is to 'paint' green food coloring onto the white parts of the regular Oreo cookies with a food decorating brush.
    • Whipped Topping Tip: Try not to over-fold the whipped topping into the cream cheese because this will actually start to deflate it and the end result won't be as fluffy.
    • Thaw Frozen Whip: If using a frozen whipped cream like Cool Whip, make sure you thaw it in the fridge first.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 544kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 359mg | Potassium: 313mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 718IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 191mg | Iron: 4mg

    28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes

    February 24, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    If you're just looking for a basic kimchi fermentation recipe or want to explore adding kimchi to various dishes, I've got you covered here! Although some are traditional, many of the kimchi recipes on this list are fusion favorites and range from breakfast options to main dishes and everything in between.

    Kimchi in a small bowl.

    After developing all of these recipes, I've had my fair share of kimchi and I'm really loving the flavor it unexpectedly adds to the classics. Check out this collection of my best kimchi recipes below.

    Besides the recipe that outlines how to make the kimchi, I highly recommend checking out the kimchi chicken. The kimchi eggs are also a big hit because of the unique but easy cooking method that is followed and the creamy, flavorful results.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Start With the Kimchi Basics

    This is the best place to start when diving into cooking with kimchi. The post below will not only outline how to make kimchi, but it covers common questions, gives great tips, storage information and more.

    1
    Kimchi in a jar and on a fork.
    how to make kimchi
    This step-by-step tutorial goes through the process of making this delicious side dish from scratch, with loads of tips; it's easier than you might think!
    Kimchi Recipe

    Recipes You Can Use Kimchi in

    Once you've learned how to make homemade kimchi, you can use it in any of the recipes below.

    2
    Korean kimchi scrambled eggs in pan.
    Kimchi Scrambled Eggs
    My first experience creating a kimchi fusion recipe began here: scrambled eggs (my husband's idea). With an elevated cooking technique and minimal ingredients, the kimchi really shines in this recipe!
    Kimchi Scrambled Eggs Recipe
    3
    Kimchi chowder with corn in bowl.
    Kimchi Chowder
    This creamy, kimchi and corn chowder is perfectly warm and cozy. It's best suited for cool days or when you're feeling under the weather. The kimchi is both cooked into the chowder and added as a topping for a boost of flavor and nutrition.
    Kimchi Chowder Recipe
    4
    Kimchi tofu vegan soup in white bowl.
    Kimchi Tofu Soup
    The base of this soup is miso-flavored, making it a Japanese-Korean mix. Adding tofu and mushrooms for protein makes it a suitable option for vegans; just be sure that the kimchi you buy or make is also vegan-friendly (some are, some aren't).
    Kimchi Tofu Soup Recipe
    5
    Kimchi cream cheese spread in a small black bowl, surrounded by tortilla chips.
    Kimchi Cream Cheese Spread
    This versatile spread for crackers, bagels and toast can also be used as a dip for veggies and tortilla chips. It has a touch of sweetness from the sweet and sour bell pepper topping, which complements it nicely.
    Kimchi Cream Cheese Spread Recipe
    6
    Korean kimchi chicken thighs in bowl with lemon wedges.
    Korean Kimchi Chicken
    These kimchi-marinated, grilled chicken thighs have definitely become a favorite in our house. Cooking the thighs on the grill results in a caramelized, crispy skin bursting with sweet and savory flavor.
    Korean Kimchi Chicken Recipe
    7
    Kimchi omelette on plate with fork.
    Kimchi Omelette
    For a more technical egg-breakfast (or dinner), give this kimchi omelette a try. The kimchi filling brings Korean flavor to a French delicacy along with more classic ingredients like bacon, spinach and cheddar cheese.
    Kimchi Omelette Recipe
    8
    Kimchi salad in salad bowl on wooden background.
    Kimchi Salad
    Kimchi and tuna combine with fresh vegetables to create a healthy salad with an Asian twist. The homemade, gochujang dressing that perfectly complements this salad is a must-try! You can easily take this salad for a packed lunch with the dressing on the side.
    Kimchi Salad Recipe
    9
    Kimchi and shrimp stir fry over rice in a bowl on wooden background, overhead shot.
    Kimchi Shrimp Stir Fry
    Shrimp are marinated in the brine from the kimchi jar and then stir-fried in butter with cabbage, bell peppers, broccolini and kimchi. This stir fry is served over basmati rice and garnished with lime wedges for some zest. Apart from the marinating time of 30 minutes, this recipe comes together quickly, so it's great for busy weeknights.
    Kimchi Shrimp Stir Fry Recipe
    10
    Kimchi beef stew in Asian bowl.
    Kimchi Stew
    This is one of the quickest stews you will ever make. Cubed, marinated sirloin steaks are simmered with kimchi and gochujang for only 15 minutes. Mashed potatoes, rice and crusty bread are all perfect sides for this stew.
    Spicy Korean Kimchi Stew Recipe
    11
    Kimchi rice bowl with chicken breast.
    Kimchi Rice Bowl
    I love a good rice bowl and this one with kimchi, chicken breast and pickled veggies does not disappoint. It's packed with protein and vitamins and can be prepped ahead of time for a healthy lunch option throughout the week.
    Kimchi Rice Bowl Recipe
    12
    Deviled eggs with kimchi, pickled veggies and cilantro on parchment.
    Kimchi Deviled Eggs
    This classic party appetizer is taken up a notch with tangy kimchi, sesame oil and a pickled veggie topping. If you're getting tired of the same old flavors, try this fusion combination!
    Kimchi Deviled Eggs Recipe
    13
    Kimchi potato salad with chives in white bowl.
    Kimchi Potato Salad
    The creaminess of this potato salad with the spice and tang of kimchi is the perfect match. This cold side is a lovely accompaniment to Korean BBQ such as the chicken thigh recipe above or your favorite BBQ'd protein.
    Kimchi Potato Salad Recipe
    14
    Kimchi burritos cut open and stacked with toothpick.
    Kimchi Burrito
    For a filling high-protein and high-carb meal, look no further than these kimchi burritos. Besides the kimchi, these burritos are loaded with rice, beans, cheese, vegetables and chicken tenders and then baked in the oven. Freezing instructions are included.
    Kimchi Burrito Recipe
    15
    Kimchi mayo in jar and on spoon.
    Kimchi Mayo
    This recipe includes two great options for making tasty kimchi mayo. One option is quick and convenient using prepared mayo. The other option (my favorite) involves making mayo from scratch. Both can be used in place of regular mayo to liven up sandwiches, wraps and burgers.
    Kimchi Mayo Recipe
    16
    Kimchi bacon fried rice on a plate on brown background.
    Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice
    Fried rice, a comfort food favorite, is made all the more comforting with the addition of kimchi and bacon! You only need one pan and less than 30 minutes to get this side dish or main course on the table.
    Kimchi Bacon Fried Rice Recipe
    17
    Sliced kimchi pizza on round serving board.
    Kimchi Pizza
    Kimchi is the star ingredient on this pizza, alongside the classics like melted cheese and marinara. The combination does sound strange but it is surprisingly delicious!
    Kimchi Pizza Recipe
    18
    Kimchi cod tacos in serving dish.
    Kimchi Tacos
    Celebrate your next Taco Tuesday Korean-style. We stuffed these soft tacos with kimchi, fried/breaded pieces of cod with Mexican spices and edamame beans!
    Kimchi Tacos Recipe
    19
    Kimchi carbonara in a bowl.
    Kimchi Carbonara
    This recipe for kimchi carbonara takes an easier approach to the Italian pasta, using heavy cream to achieve a rich and wonderfully creamy sauce. The kimchi along with the brine from the jar adds a spicy, tangy bite to the dish.
    Kimchi Carbonara Recipe
    20
    Kimchi fries with cheese in baking dish.
    Kimchi Fries
    These kimchi fries remind me of a Canadian poutine but actually originated in Texas at the Tex-Mex Korean BBQ fusion restaurant: Chi'Lantro. In this version, crispy, oven-baked fries are topped with emmental cheese, kimchi and a few other toppings. Instead of a brown gravy, the fries are served with a spicy kimchi sauce.
    Kimchi Fries Recipe
    21
    Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on serving tray with skewer.
    Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches
    Another classic turned Korean fusion are these grilled cheese sandwiches with a kimchi and spicy mayo filling. This is an easy, quick recipe that takes just over 10 minutes to prepare.
    Kimchi Grilled Cheese Recipe
    22
    Kimchi quesadillas on serving tray.
    Kimchi Quesadillas
    These quesadillas are not at all traditional with their mix of Mexican and Korean ingredients. The tangy kimchi gives them a nice kick and is basically a substitute for the red salsa that you would normally serve quesadillas with.
    Kimchi Quesadilla Recipe
    23
    Kimchi pancakes stacked on top of each other.
    Kimchi Pancake
    Kimchi pancakes, which are called 'kimchijeon' in Korea, are served as a side dish, snack or appetizer. These pancakes are not like the standard pancake we eat for breakfast in America; they are filled with savory, Asian ingredients like kimchi, soy sauce and sesame seeds. They are quite tasty!
    Kimchi Pancake Recipe
    24
    Kimchi udon in a bowl with chop sticks.
    Kimchi Udon Noodle Stir Fry
    This kimchi udon is a very simple stir fry with few ingredients. You're basically just cooking the udon noodles and then mixing them with stir-fried veggies and a quick sauce that's full of umami flavor.
    Kimchi Udon Noodle Stir Fry Recipe
    25
    Kimchi ramen noodle soup in bowl with wooden chopsticks.
    Kimchi Ramen
    A basic ramen noodle package is elevated to restaurant quality level with the addition of marinated pork, spices and kimchi. The flavor is out of this world.
    Kimchi Ramen Recipe
    26
    Kimchi burger with creamy kimchi sauce.
    Korean Kimchi Burgers With Creamy Kimchi Sauce
    Homemade beef patties are blended with kimchi, soy sauce and black sesame seeds and served with a delicious, creamy, kimchi sauce. The crunch of the kimchi adds that desired texture you would normally get from adding a pickle to your burger but with bigger flavor.
    Korean Kimchi Burger Recipe
    27
    Kimchi mac and cheese in a bowl.
    Kimchi Mac and Cheese
    Kimchi pairs really well with creamy dishes like in this kimchi mac. This is no doubt the creamiest macaroni and cheese I have ever had! After letting the cheese sauce set and absorb into the pasta for a few minutes it becomes a really nice consistency and retains its creaminess well.
    Kimchi Mac and Cheese Recipe
    28
    Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
    Kimchi Dumplings
    These kimchi dumplings are fun to make AND eat. The pork filling is cooked and then wrapped up into pre-made dumpling wrappers. They are steamed using a bamboo steamer and served with a salty, zesty dipping sauce.
    Kimchi Dumplings Recipe

    Which Recipe Will You Pick?

    Did you enjoy these kimchi recipes? Which one was your ❤️favorite so far? I'd love to hear if you have any ideas for ways to use kimchi and I might just turn it into a recipe. Let me know in the 📝 comments below. And please share the round up!

    Kimchi Carbonara

    February 22, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    If you are in a weeknight dinner rut, allow this recipe for kimchi carbonara to pull you out of it! This recipe is straightforward, takes less than 30 minutes to make, and tastes incredibly decadent and unique.

    Kimchi carbonara in a white bowl with kimchi on the side.

    Italian and Asian flavors combine to make a fusion dish that is sure to add some variety to your plate. This is one delicious kimchi bowl, kind of like my kimchi rice bowl recipe but with creamy pasta and meaty pork.

    If you like kimchi with noodles as much as I do, you'll probably like my kimchi ramen soup as well.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Kimchi Carbonara Ingredients

    Kimchi carbonara ingredients prepped and labeled.

    Kimchi and noodles in a cream sauce is a surprisingly scrumptious combination, especially with the addition of savory pancetta and pecorino. You only need a few other ingredients that you likely already have in your pantry.

    • spaghetti - You can use regular spaghetti noodles, spaghettini or linguine.
    • pancetta - The pancetta should be found near the specialty cheese or deli area, but you could substitute diced American-style bacon instead. This option will not have the exact same flavor as pancetta, but will still be tasty and add some smokiness as well.
    • kimchi - Make sure to keep the brine with the kimchi for extra umami, tangy flavor. I have a tutorial for how to make spicy kimchi if you're interested.
    • pecorino romano cheese - Most grocery stores should have a cheese counter or deli with employees available to help you locate the ingredients that you need. Pecorino cheese is a hard cheese made from sheep's milk. If you are unable to find pecorino, you can substitute it with a block of Parmigiano-Reggiano (Parmesan) cheese instead. This will lend a slightly nuttier flavor due to being aged longer, but will still serve the pasta well.
    • green onions (not pictured) - Optional garnish.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Kimchi carbonara in a white bowl with sliced green onions and grated Romano cheese.

    How to Make it

    1. Cook the pasta. Bring a large pot of lightly salted water to a boil. Cook pasta until al dente, according to package instructions. Drain the pasta, reserving ¼ cup of the water. Toss the pasta with a bit of olive oil and reserve.
    2. Fry the pancetta. Add the pancetta to a large skillet over medium heat. Cook, stirring occasionally, until it starts to brown and crisp up (about 5 minutes). Add the garlic and cook for 1 more minute.
    3. Add kimchi. Add the kimchi, heavy cream, cheese, salt and pepper and stir it together.
    4. Add spaghetti to sauce. Transfer the pasta to the skillet plus the reserved pasta water. Stir until the sauce coats the spaghetti.
    5. Serve. Serve with more grated pecorino cheese and fresh green onions.
    Kimchi carbonara around a fork in a white bowl.

    Alcohol Pairing

    Carbonara typically pairs best with white wine or rosé like a Pinot Gris or Chardonnay, and you could choose a bottle from central Italy (Lazio region) where carbonara is traditionally served. A red wine can also work as long as it is not too tannic, such as a Merlot.

    On the other hand, you could opt for a bottle of soju to honor the Korean influence on the dish. Both locations have a strong social eating culture, so be sure to share with friends if you want to truly honor the cultural origins of your kimchi carbonara!

    Leftover Storage

    This meal will last up to 4 days in the refrigerator and can be reheated in small portions as needed. Store it in an airtight container.

    Kimchi carbonara in a white bowl with kimchi and grated pecorino in the background.

    ❤️More Delicious Kimchi Recipes

    • Kimchi hot dogs with small bowls of toppings on serving tray.
      Kimchi Hot Dogs
    • Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
      Kimchi Dumplings
    • Kimchi burritos cut open and stacked with toothpick.
      Kimchi Burritos
    • Kimchi quesadillas on serving tray.
      Kimchi Quesadillas

    If you tried this Kimchi Carbonara Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi carbonara in a bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Kimchi Carbonara

    This fusion kimchi carbonara recipe is straightforward, takes less than 30 minutes to make, and tastes incredibly decadent and unique.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Italian, Korean
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 821kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 12" skillet

    Ingredients

    • 14 ounces dry spaghetti
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 8 ounces pancetta diced into small cubes
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 cup kimchi with the brine
    • ¾ cup heavy cream
    • ¼ cup pecorino romano cheese grated - plus extra to serve
    • 1 teaspoon black peppercorns crushed
    • salt to taste
    • green onions chopped (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Bring a large pot of lightly salted water to a boil. Cook pasta until al dente, according to package instructions. Drain the pasta, reserving ¼ cup of the water. Toss the pasta with a bit of olive oil and reserve.
      14 ounces dry spaghetti, 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • Add the pancetta to a large skillet over medium heat. Cook, stirring occasionally, until it starts to brown and crisp up (about 5 minutes). Add the garlic and cook for 1 more minute.
      8 ounces pancetta, 2 cloves garlic
    • Add the kimchi, heavy cream, cheese, salt and pepper and stir it together.
      1 cup kimchi, ¾ cup heavy cream, ¼ cup pecorino romano cheese, salt, 1 teaspoon black peppercorns
    • Transfer the pasta to the skillet plus the reserved pasta water. Stir until the sauce coats the spaghetti.
    • Serve with more grated pecorino cheese and fresh green onions.

    Notes

    • This meal will last up to 4 days in the refrigerator and can be reheated in small portions as needed.
    • If you are unable to find pecorino, you can substitute it with a block of Parmigiano-Reggiano (Parmesan) cheese instead.
    • Carbonara typically pairs best with white wine or rosé like a Pinot Gris or Chardonnay, and you could choose a bottle from central Italy (Lazio region) where carbonara is traditionally served. A red wine can also work as long as it is not too tannic, such as a Merlot.
    • On the other hand, you could opt for a bottle of soju to honor the Korean influence on the dish.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 821kcal | Carbohydrates: 78g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 45g | Saturated Fat: 20g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 612mg | Potassium: 445mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 736IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 137mg | Iron: 2mg

    Bison Short Ribs

    February 15, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Tear into these bison ribs with juicy, tender meat smothered in barbecue sauce. Brown sugar adds a little sweetness to the spicy dry rub and earthy oregano. Serve these ribs after a long week of work, if you're having guests over for dinner or whenever you're in the mood for hearty BBQ flavors.

    BBQ bison short ribs in white dish.

    Bison meat is a gourmet alternative to regular beef ribs. Combining the braising method with BBQ flavors results in a rich, smoky, delicious main dish. The BBQ sauce caramelizes during cooking and enhances the meat's natural flavors.

    The ribs taste amazing with this kimchi potato salad, hemp seed salad or burrata salad on the side. For dessert, I like to pair it with a strawberry jelly roll.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍖 Ingredients

    You only need a few ingredients plus pantry items to make this delicious rib dinner.

    Bison BBQ ribs ingredients labeled on grey background.
    • bison short ribs - Bone in. Bison short ribs are a cut of meat taken from the rib section. They are meaty and contain a good amount of connective tissue, which makes them great for this slow-cooking method.
    • olive oil - Not pictured.
    • BBQ dry rub - I use a pre-made mix from the grocery store. It usually contains smoked paprika, brown sugar, salt and other spices.
    • brown sugar - The brown sugar gives a nice, rich color and caramelization on the ribs plus a sweet flavor that complements the natural flavor of the meat.
    • BBQ sauce - Choose your favorite.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🔪 How to Make Bison Ribs

    Bison short ribs getting covered with BBQ sauce in foil-lined dish.
    1. Rinse the bison ribs in cold water. Pat dry with paper towels.
    2. Combine the BBQ rub, brown sugar, dried oregano and sea salt in a small bowl.
    3. Brush the ribs with olive oil. Rub the dry seasoning mixture into the ribs.
    4. Transfer the seasoned ribs to a resealable plastic bag. Marinate for 2 hours in the fridge or overnight.
    5. Preheat the oven to 275°F. Place the seasoned ribs in a foil-lined baking dish. Cover the dish tightly with another piece of foil and seal the foil together so that the meat will steam.
    6. Bake the ribs in the preheated oven for 3 ½ to 4 hours, until they've reached an internal temperature of 205°F. The meat should be very tender and fall off the bone.
    7. Brush the ribs generously with barbecue sauce. Set the oven to a low broil. Broil the ribs for about 3 minutes, until the BBQ sauce just starts to bubble and caramelize.
    8. Serve the bison ribs!
    Cooked BBQ bison ribs in white dish with a kitchen towel on the side.

    💭 Top Tip

    Make sure the dish is covered tightly with foil or the ribs will take longer to cook and become dry. Also make sure there aren't any tears in the foil from covering the ribs. I made this mistake once without noticing and needless to say, my rib dinner was not ready on time! It needs to be a tight seal to keep the moisture and heat in.

    🥗 Side Dish Ideas

    Pair your bison ribs with cold side dishes, such as kimchi slaw and creamy caprese pasta salad, to offset the hot, filling entrée. Offer rolls or electric skillet cornbread that diners can use to mop up the sauce.

    For warm side dishes, try baked beans, roasted turnip fries, macaroni and cheese, grilled pickles, hush puppies or green bean casserole.

    🌡️ Bison Ribs Storage

    • You can store leftover bison ribs in a covered container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
    • Reheat them up in the oven and add more barbecue sauce for best results.
    • For longer use, you can freeze ribs in an airtight container for three months or in a vacuum-sealed bag for up to 2 to 3 years.
    Cooked BBQ bison ribs in white dish and on a fork.

    🥩 More Mouthwatering Bison Recipes

    • Bison recipes collage.
      14 of Our Best Bison Recipes
    • Bison chili with toppings in cast iron dish.
      Slow Cooker Bison Chili
    • Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan.
      Bison Brisket Nachos
    • Bison bone broth in large pot.
      Bison Bone Broth

    If you tried this Bison Ribs Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    BBQ bison short ribs on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Bison Short Ribs

    Tear into these bison ribs with juicy, tender meat. The short ribs are doubled up on bold BBQ flavor with a sauce and a rub! Serve these ribs after a long week of work, if you're having guests over for dinner or whenever you're in the mood for hearty BBQ flavors.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Canadian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 hours hours 30 minutes minutes
    Marinating Time: 2 hours hours
    Total Time 5 hours hours 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 1052kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Ingredients

    • 5 pounds bone-in bison short ribs
    • 3 tablespoons BBQ dry rub
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
    • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
    • 1 ½ teaspoons sea salt
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • ½ cup BBQ sauce
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Rinse the bison short ribs in cold water. Pat dry with paper towels.
      5 pounds bone-in bison short ribs
    • Combine the BBQ rub, brown sugar, dried oregano and sea salt in a small bowl.
      3 tablespoons BBQ dry rub, 2 tablespoons brown sugar, 1 tablespoon dried oregano, 1 ½ teaspoons sea salt
    • Brush the ribs with olive oil. Rub the dry seasoning mixture into the ribs.
      2 tablespoons olive oil
    • Transfer the seasoned ribs to a resealable plastic bag. Marinate for 2 hours in the fridge or overnight.
    • Preheat the oven to 275°F. Place the seasoned ribs in a foil-lined baking dish. Cover the dish tightly with another piece of foil and seal the foil together so that the meat will steam.
    • Bake the ribs in the preheated oven for 3 ½ to 4 hours, until they've reached an internal temperature of 205°F. The meat should be very tender and fall off the bone.
    • Brush the ribs generously with barbecue sauce. Set the oven to a low broil. Broil the ribs for about 3 minutes, until the BBQ sauce just starts to bubble and caramelize.
      ½ cup BBQ sauce
    • Serve!

    Notes

    • You can store leftover bison ribs in a covered container in the fridge for up to 4 days. Reheat them up in the oven and add more barbecue sauce for best results.
    • For longer use, you can freeze ribs in an airtight container for three months or in a vacuum-sealed bag for up to 2 to 3 years.
    • Make sure the dish is covered tightly with the foil or the ribs will take longer to cook and become dry.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 1052kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 82g | Fat: 72g | Saturated Fat: 33g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 257mg | Sodium: 1864mg | Potassium: 127mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 180IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 481mg | Iron: 12mg

    Ground Beef Stir Fry

    February 8, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    What makes this ground beef stir fry recipe unique from the others is its rainbow of vegetables, from red bell peppers to green onions. This stir fry only takes about 20 minutes to prepare and the components can even be prepped and refrigerated ahead of time.

    Ground beef and veggie stir fry in black bowl with chopsticks.

    A 20-Minute Weeknight-Friendly Beef Skillet

    • This stir fry is a quick and nutritious recipe suitable for busy weeknights. It's one of my favorite cooked purple cabbage recipes.
    • It is vegetable heavy in comparison to other stir fries, such as my kimchi tofu stir fry, which makes it an excellent way to use up the produce in your fridge that's about to go bad.
    • You can easily customize the vegetables and prep them in advance.
    • This meal makes you feel satisfied but doesn't weigh you down.
    • I find store-bought sauces way too sweet. This homemade teriyaki sauce has just the right amount of tang and sweetness.

    SUMMARIZE & SAVE THIS CONTENT ON

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Perplexity
    Grok
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Ground beef stir fry ingredients labeled.
    • ground beef - you are looking for lean ground beef so that the stir fry isn't greasy
    • mini corn cobs - these come canned in the grocery store and need to be drained and rinsed
    • red cabbage - check out my post on how to expertly shred cabbage
    • sesame oil - adds amazing flavor to the stir fry - make sure it's toasted sesame oil
    • peanut oil - peanut oil is great for stir frying because it has a high smoke point
    • broccoli florets - make sure they are small in size so that they cook quicky and evenly with the other veggies

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • Since there are already red and yellow bell peppers, why not add orange bell peppers for the extra color? If you do not like or cannot find orange bell peppers, carrots are a great substitute for their mild flavor and frequent use in Asian recipes.
    • For purple, there is eggplant for its meaty texture, or purple asparagus which has a less fibrous texture than green or white asparagus.
    • Now you may be thinking that there are no blue options, but there is a great and easy one. Blue corn tastes the same as yellow corn but is rich in anthocyanin, which gives it its deep color.
    • If you want a heavier stir fry, more like this quinoa stir fry, serve it with your favorite grains or noodles.

    With these suggestions, you can make a full rainbow of vegetables.

    How to Make Ground Beef Stir Fry

    Homemade teriyaki sauce in bowl.

    Step 1. Make the sauce. Whisk the sauce ingredients together and set aside.

    Browned ground beef in bowl.

    Step 2. Brown the ground beef. Heat a wok or skillet over medium-high heat. Cook and crumble the ground beef until browned. Remove from the pan and reserve.

    Colorful veggies in wok.

    Step 3. Stir fry the veggies. Heat the peanut oil in the skillet. Add the vegetables (except for the cobs) and stir-fry for about 5 minutes, until tender-crisp. Turn the heat down to medium.

    Ground beef and veggies in black bowl.

    Step 4. Return the beef and serve. Add the mini corn cobs, green onions, reserved ground beef and sauce. Cook until the sauce thickens. Garnish with sesame seeds. Serve the ground beef stir fry over rice, noodles or on its own.

    Joss' Make-Ahead Tips

    1. Fresh Veggies: Cut the veggies up to 2 to 3 days in advance and store in the fridge in an airtight container.
    2. Ground Beef: You can brown the ground beef within 1 to 2 days in advance. Again, store in an airtight container in the fridge.
    3. Side: If you're serving it with rice or noodles on the side, that can be cooked within a day in advance (for best quality) and reheated right in the wok with the hot stir fry. Just remember to refrigerate quickly after cooking.

    Beverage Pairing

    When it comes to drink recommendations, red-based drinks are on the top. They are commonly matched with red-meat dishes.

    One of the best alcoholic drink choices for this dish would be syrah or shiraz. This wine has a peppery edge, but will taste different depending on where it is from. It will pair nicely with the ground beef and sweet, dark teriyaki sauce.

    If you want a non-alcoholic option: there is club soda with a lemon twist, Moscow mule mocktail or cranberry juice with a splash of apple juice to cut down the tang and tartness.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you store leftovers?

    Store any leftovers in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

    What is tender-crisp?

    With this recipe, you are going to want to cook the vegetables until they are 'tender-crisp'. Tender-crisp vegetables are heated and cooked through but they still have a little bit of crunch to them. If you cook the vegetables for too long, they will become mushy and unappetizing.

    Do you cook vegetables before or after the ground beef?

    I like to cook the ground beef before the vegetables, reserve it and then add it back to the vegetables once they're cooked. This way the veggies will absorb the beef flavor and retain that tender-crisp texture.

    Can I make it vegan?

    Yes! For the teriyaki sauce, use vegetable-based broth instead of chicken broth. For the stir fry, use veggie ground instead of ground beef.

    Ground beef stir fry with a range of vegetables in black bowl with chopsticks.

    ❤️ More Vegetable Filled Dishes You Will Love

    • Chickpea and salmon salad in bowl with lemon slices.
      Easy Chickpea Salmon Salad
    • Bok choy stir fry in frying pan.
      Bok Choy Stir Fry
    • Kimchi salad in salad bowl on wooden background.
      Kimchi Salad
    • Mexican soup in black bowls.
      Slow Cooker Mexican Soup

    If you tried this Ground Beef Stir Fry Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Ground beef stir fry with veggies in bowl with chopsticks.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Ground Beef Stir Fry

    This ground beef stir fry has a rainbow of vegetables and a delicious teriyaki sauce. This stir fry only takes about 20 minutes to prepare and the sauce and other components can even be prepped and refrigerated ahead of time.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Chinese, Japanese
    Diet Low Calorie
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 11 minutes minutes
    Total Time 21 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 404kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Wok

    Ingredients

    For the Teriyaki Sauce

    • ¼ cup chicken broth
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    • ½ cup soy sauce
    • ¼ cup brown sugar
    • 2 teaspoons sesame oil
    • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh ginger minced
    • 1 ½ teaspoons garlic minced

    For the Stir-Fry

    • 1 pound lean ground beef
    • 1 tablespoon peanut oil
    • 1 cup green beans chopped into 2" pieces
    • 2 cups small broccoli florets
    • 2 cups red cabbage thinly sliced
    • 1 cup red bell pepper sliced
    • 1 cup yellow bell pepper sliced
    • 1 cup baby corn drained, rinsed and cut in half
    • 2 green onions thinly sliced
    • sesame seeds to garnish
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Whisk the chicken broth and cornstarch together in a small bowl. Add the rest of the sauce ingredients and whisk until combined. Reserve.
      ¼ cup chicken broth, 1 tablespoon cornstarch, ½ cup soy sauce, ¼ cup brown sugar, 2 teaspoons sesame oil, 1 ½ teaspoons fresh ginger, 1 ½ teaspoons garlic
    • Heat a wok or large skillet over medium-high heat. Cook and crumble the ground beef until browned, about 5 minutes. Remove from skillet and reserve.
      1 pound lean ground beef
    • Heat the peanut oil in the skillet. Add the green beans, broccoli, cabbage and bell peppers and stir-fry for about 5 minutes (until the vegetables are tender-crisp).
      1 tablespoon peanut oil, 1 cup green beans, 2 cups small broccoli florets, 2 cups red cabbage, 1 cup red bell pepper, 1 cup yellow bell pepper
    • Turn the heat down to medium. Add the mini corn cobs, green onions and reserved ground beef. Quickly whisk the reserved teriyaki sauce again and pour it into the skillet. Cook and stir for 1 to 2 more minutes, until the sauce thickens.
      1 cup baby corn, 2 green onions
    • Garnish with sesame seeds. Serve over rice, noodles or on its own.

    Notes

    • Vegetable Doneness: With this recipe, you are going to want to cook the vegetables until they are 'tender-crisp'. Tender-crisp vegetables are heated and cooked through but they still have a little bit of crunch to them.
    • Leftover Storage: Store any leftovers in a covered container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.
    • Reheating: Reheat the leftovers in a pan/wok over medium heat with a touch of peanut oil in the bottom of the pan. You can also reheat them in the microwave if desired.
    • Make Ahead Tips:
      • Fresh Veggies: Cut the veggies up to 2 to 3 days in advance and store in the fridge in an airtight container.
      • Ground Beef: You can brown the ground beef within 1 to 2 days in advance. Again, store in an airtight container in the fridge.
      • Side Dish: If you're serving it with rice or noodles on the side, that can be cooked within a day in advance and reheated right in the wok with the hot stir fry. Just remember to refrigerate quickly after cooking.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 404kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 71mg | Sodium: 1786mg | Potassium: 1103mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 2435IU | Vitamin C: 190mg | Calcium: 95mg | Iron: 5mg

    Valentine's Day Red Velvet Sheet Cake

    February 1, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    You can never go wrong with a holiday-themed cake that has all of the colors of love, and this Valentine's Day cake is no exception. This red velvet sheet cake is quick and easy yet looks amazing.

    Valentine's Day cake slice on white plate.

    If you're bringing Valentine's Day treats for the classroom, this portable cake is perfect as it can be cut into 12 to 20 slices.

    It's decorated with red, pink and white toppings like sliced strawberries and candy sprinkles but you can choose to decorate it as you wish. It can be a lot of fun to get creative with, so use your imagination!

    I also make this strawberry champagne cake and strawberry hard candy that are perfect to make this special day even sweeter.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🍓 Ingredients

    Valentine's Day cake ingredients prepped and labeled on brown background.
    • cake flour - Cake flour has a lower protein content, so it will form less gluten.
    • red gel food coloring - You can use liquid food coloring but it will be harder to achieve brilliant colors than with the gel.
    • buttermilk - If you don't have buttermilk, you can add 1 tablespoon of vinegar or lemon juice to a 1 cup measuring glass. Then, fill it with regular milk until it reaches the 1 cup mark. Stir it and let sit for 5 to 10 minutes.
    • white vinegar - The vinegar may appear to be an odd addition, but do not omit it! White vinegar serves as a helpful leavening agent for cakes when used with baking soda, creating a moist, fluffy, and delicious crumb structure. It was also originally used in red velvet cakes to preserve the color from beet juice. Vinegar can be added to nearly all baking recipes to improve the consistency of the final product.
    • Fresh strawberries - It is best to add them just before serving because otherwise you will end up with moisture from the strawberries leaking onto the frosting. You don't have to use fresh strawberries as a decoration; it's only a suggestion.
    • Red and pink sprinkles - Or any type of Valentine's Day themed sprinkles.

    *Check for ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    📖 Recipe Tweaks

    For some tweaking ideas, feel free to swap out your food coloring based on what you want the final appearance of your Valentine's Day cake to be. Leaving it in the batter as the recipe states will give you a nice dark red cake with white icing (think classic red velvet cake). This option will look clean and simple with some sliced strawberries and/or sprinkles on top.

    Alternatively, you could add your food dye to the icing for a pink cake with a brown center. A very small amount will create a beautiful rosy pink cake, but adding more will make a bold and festive bright pink cake.

    These colors will also look lovely with strawberries and sprinkles, but you could get creative with whatever decorations you have available.

    🍰 How to Make Valentine's Day Cake

    Empty parchment lined baking sheet.

    Step 1. Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease and lightly flour a 9" x 13" baking pan or line it with parchment paper.

    Cocoa powder and flour in bowl with wooden spoon.

    Step 2. Sift together the cake flour, cocoa, baking soda and salt.

    Butter and sugar in bowl with mixer.

    Step 3. In a separate bowl, combine the butter and white sugar until fluffy.

    Red cake batter in bowl.

    Step 4. Beat in the oil, eggs, vanilla extract and food coloring until combined.

    Red velvet cake ingredients in bowl.

    Step 5. Alternate adding the flour mixture and buttermilk to the butter mixture, until combined. Stir in the vinegar.

    Red velvet cake batter in pan.

    Step 6. Pour the batter into the baking pan.

    Red velvet sheet cake on parchment with strawberries and candy decorations on the side.

    Step 7. Bake for about 35 to 40 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Let cool before frosting.

    Cream cheese frosting in bowl with beater.

    Step 8. Combine the softened cream cheese and butter in a bowl with an electric mixer, until smooth. Add the vanilla extract. Slowly add the powdered sugar with the mixer on low, until combined.

    Red velvet sheet cake with cream cheese frosting on baking rack.

    Step 9. You can either keep the cake in the pan or carefully remove it before frosting. Frost the cake with the cream cheese frosting. Decorate it with the fresh strawberries and sprinkles.

    Valentine's Day cake on parchment.

    Step 10. Slice the Valentine's Day cake and serve!

    💝 Joss' Tips

    • Make Ahead Prep: This cream cheese frosting can be prepped ahead of time and then refrigerated for up to two weeks. Bring it up to room temperature before frosting the cake.
    • Decorating: You could use a piping bag or an icing pen to add artistic designs and a special message for that special someone, or for your kids if that is who you are making this cake for. You can even attempt to make icing flowers or hearts.
    • Moisten the Cake: If it turned out dry, no worries! Check out my tutorial for how to fix a dry cake.
    • Convert to Cupcakes: You may also prefer to make Valentine's Day cupcakes instead of a larger Valentine's Day cake. To do this, you need only adjust the baking time. Converting a cake recipe to cupcakes generally requires reducing the bake time by up to half, so check on your cupcakes with a toothpick 15-20 minutes into baking to see if they are finished.
    • Remove Cake Carefully: You can either decorate and serve the cake right out of the pan or remove it and then decorate, depending on your preference. This video below shows you how to easily remove the cake from the pan without making a crumbled mess.

    🌡️ Valentine's Day Cake Storage

    • Fridge: Cover the cake and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Serving: Take it out of the fridge 30 minutes before serving for best results.
    • Freezer: This Valentine's Day cake can be frozen frosted or unfrosted for up to 3 months. If you prefer to freeze the cake in slices, make sure to wrap each one individually and place into a freezer bag.
    Frosted Valentine's Day sheet cake with strawberries and candy decorations.

    💕 More Amazing Red Desserts

    • Strawberry parfait in stemmed glasses.
      Strawberry Parfait
    • Strawberry orange compote in jar with spoon and toast on the side.
      Easy Homemade Strawberry Compote
    • Strawberry crumble in tart dish with vanilla ice cream and spoon.
      Easy Strawberry Crumble
    • Strawberry ice cream sundae with chocolate shavings in curved bowl.
      Strawberry Ice Cream Sundae

    If you tried this 💝🍰 Valentine's Day Cake Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Valentine's Day cake slice on white plate with fresh strawberry slices.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Valentine's Day Red Velvet Sheet Cake

    This Valentine's Day sheet cake with the colors of love is quick and easy yet looks amazing! If you're bringing Valentine's Day treats for the classroom or elsewhere, this portable cake is perfect as it can be cut into 12 to 20 slices.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 20 slices
    Calories 439kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 9" x 13" baking pan

    Ingredients

    For the Cake Batter

    • 2 ⅔ cups cake flour
    • 2 tablespoons cocoa powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup butter softened
    • 1 ¾ cups white sugar
    • 1 cup canola oil
    • 3 large eggs at room temperature
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • 2 teaspoons red gel food coloring
    • 1 cup buttermilk at room temperature
    • 2 teaspoons white vinegar

    For the Cream Cheese Frosting

    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • ½ cup butter softened
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 3 cups powdered sugar

    To Decorate

    • fresh strawberries sliced--optional
    • red and pink sprinkles
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    For the Cake Batter

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease and lightly flour a 9" x 13" baking pan or line it with parchment paper.
      Empty parchment lined baking sheet.
    • Sift together the cake flour, cocoa, baking soda and salt.
      2 ⅔ cups cake flour, 2 tablespoons cocoa powder, 1 teaspoon baking soda, ¼ teaspoon salt
      Cocoa powder and flour in bowl with wooden spoon.
    • In a separate bowl, combine the butter and white sugar until fluffy. Beat in the oil, eggs, vanilla extract and food coloring until combined.
      ½ cup butter, 1 ¾ cups white sugar, 1 cup canola oil, 3 large eggs, 1 tablespoon vanilla extract, 2 teaspoons red gel food coloring
      Butter and sugar in bowl with mixer.
    • Alternate adding the flour mixture and buttermilk to the butter mixture, until combined. Stir in the vinegar.
      1 cup buttermilk, 2 teaspoons white vinegar
      Red velvet cake ingredients in bowl.
    • Pour the batter into the baking pan. Bake for about 35 to 40 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Let cool before frosting.
      Red velvet cake batter in pan.

    For the Cream Cheese Frosting

    • Combine the softened cream cheese and butter in a bowl with an electric mixer, until smooth. Add the vanilla extract.
      8 ounces cream cheese, ½ cup butter, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      Frosting in bowl with hand mixer.
    • Slowly add the powdered sugar with the mixer on low, until combined.
      3 cups powdered sugar
      Cream cheese frosting in bowl with beater.

    To Decorate

    • You can either keep the cake in the pan or carefully remove it before frosting (see tips in post). Frost the cake with the cream cheese frosting. Decorate it with the fresh strawberries and sprinkles.
      Red velvet sheet cake with cream cheese frosting on baking rack.
    • Slice and serve!
      Valentine's Day cake on parchment.

    Notes

    • Fridge Storage: Cover the cake and store in the fridge for up to 5 days. Take it out of the fridge 30 minutes before serving for best results.
    • Freezer Storage: It can be frozen frosted or unfrosted for up to 3 months. If you prefer to freeze the cake in slices, make sure to wrap each one individually and place in a freezer bag.
    • Yield: This cake makes between 12 and 20 slices.
    • Note on nutrition info: The nutrition information includes the frosting.
    • Decorating tip: It is best to decorate with the fresh strawberries shortly before serving.
    • Make ahead prep: This cream cheese frosting can be prepped ahead of time and then refrigerated. Bring it up to room temperature before frosting the cake.
    • Cake to cupcake conversion: You may also prefer to make Valentine's Day cupcakes instead of a larger cake. To do this, you need only adjust the baking time. Converting a cake recipe to cupcakes generally requires reducing the bake time by up to half, so check on your cupcakes with a toothpick 15-20 minutes into baking to see if they are finished.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 439kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 65mg | Sodium: 217mg | Potassium: 70mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 36g | Vitamin A: 497IU | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    How to Make Kimchi at Home

    January 25, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Here I will show you, step by step, how to make kimchi at home as well as some helpful tips and information. This homemade Korean condiment is loaded with umami flavor and is surprisingly simple to make.

    Kimchi on a fork over a jar.

    Pieces of napa cabbage are coated in a flavor--packed paste and then left to ferment for 1 to 5 days. After the fermentation, it is ready to eat as is or add to a variety of recipes.

    Try out some of my best kimchi recipes where kimchi is the star ingredient. Some more kimchi uses include: kimchi tuna salad, Korean kimchi chicken and deviled eggs with kimchi.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Kimchi?

    Kimchi is a Korean side dish made of fermented, seasoned vegetables; mainly napa cabbage and daikon radish. It's basically a more complex, Asian version of sauerkraut.

    There are many different types of kimchi such as kkakdugi, mul and chonggak, to name a few. We are sticking to the classic kimchi with napa cabbage in this recipe.

    It is a very versatile food, which is why you will see me using it in all sorts of fusion creations.

    Ingredients

    Kimchi ingredients prepped and labeled on white background.
    • napa cabbage - It's also known as Chinese cabbage and is the main ingredient in traditional Korean kimchi. It's taller and more narrow than regular green cabbage. The leaves are also more tender and mild in flavor.
    • kosher salt - A purer type of salt that typically doesn't contain additives like iodine or anti-caking agents.
    • distilled water - Distilled water is used for making kimchi because of its purity and neutral taste. This way there are no contaminants or bacteria that can harm the process of fermenting. It's basically quality control.
    • sugar - I use white granulated sugar.
    • fish sauce - A condiment made from fermented fish and salt, used for its salty, savory, and umami flavor.
    • gochugaru - This is Korean red pepper powder/course ground.
    • gochujang paste - If you don't like it spicy, add less gochujang or gochugaru.
    • daikon radish - peeled and grated

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    Instructions

    Prep the Cabbage

    Steps collage of how to make kimchi. Cabbage prep.

    Step 1: Core the Cabbage. Remove any damaged outer leaves from the napa cabbage and then slice it into quarters. Core the cabbage and cut it into 2" pieces (Image 1).

    Step 2: Salt the Cabbage. In a large bowl, add the cabbage pieces and salt (Image 2).

    Chef's Note: Make sure you use kosher or sea salt so that it is free of additives/iodine, which is believed to negatively affect the fermentation process.

    Step 3: Massage the Salt into the Cabbage. Massage the salt into the cabbage with your hands (Image 3).

    Step 4: Add Distilled Water. Add enough of the distilled water to cover the cabbage. Stir until the salt has been dissolved (Image 4).

    Season the Cabbage

    Steps collage of how to make kimchi. Seasoning the cabbage.

    Step 5: Let the Cabbage Sit. Cover the cabbage with an inverted plate and weigh it down with something heavy, like a jar/can. Let it sit for at least 2 hours at room temperature or up to 5 hours. This will draw out the moisture which will help preserve it and absorb the seasonings later (Image 5).

    ⭐Pro Tip: If you like a crispier kimchi, I suggest letting it sit for the full 5 hours.

    Step 6: Drain the Salt Water. Drain the salt water from the cabbage (Image 6).

    Step 7: Rinse. Rinse the cabbage under cold water. Blot with paper towel to dry it and return it to the large bowl (Image 7).

    Step 8: Make the Paste. To make the paste, stir the garlic, ginger, sugar, fish sauce, gochugaru and gochujang paste together, until combined well (Image 8).

    Ferment

    Steps collage of how to make kimchi at home. Adding paste and fermenting.

    Step 9: Combine the Vegetables. Combine the cabbage with the radish and green onions (Image 9).

    Step 10: Add Paste. Add the paste. Using your hands (you can use gloves as some of the ingredients are spicy), gently massage the paste into the cabbage mixture until all of the pieces are completely coated (Image 10).

    Step 11: Transfer the Kimchi to Jars. Pack the kimchi into sanitized jars, pressing it down as you add it to minimize exposure to air. You want to leave about 2 inches of space at the top of the jar. To help keep the kimchi packed into the liquid, you can use some sort of weight placed on top of it. Wipe the jars down if needed and seal them with the lids (Image 11).

    ⭐Pro Tip: It's important that the cabbage stays covered in the brine for the lactic acid bacteria to multiply and to prevent mold. Fermentation weights come in handy for this or you can also use a cabbage leaf placed on top/tucked in with a weight on top of it. Make sure the weights are the right size for wide mouth jars.

    Step 12: Ferment the Kimchi. Place the jars in a baking dish (to help catch any juices that may overflow from the release of carbon dioxide) and set them in an area that is cool and dark. Let the kimchi sit for at least 24 hours or up to 5 days. If you see some bubbling and fizzing, that means it is fermenting (Image 12)!

    Check the kimchi once per day to press down on the vegetables with a clean spoon and make sure they stay submerged under the brine. The cabbage will slowly release more brine over time.

    After 24 hours, you can start tasting the kimchi to see if it's fermented to your liking (it will be tangy). If not, you can leave it to ferment longer.

    Chef's Notes:

    • Brine: If you need more brine to keep the kimchi covered, you can mix 1 cup of water with 1 ¼ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt. Use some of this mixture to top it up, if needed.
    • Temperature: The temperature range I ferment my kimchi in is between 65°F/18°C to 70°F/21°C and that seems to work out great. The cooler you keep it, the longer it takes to ferment.
    Kimchi in a small bowl.

    Step 13: Serve! The kimchi is now ready to eat (you can remove the weights and label the jar with the date). For full flavor, slowly ferment it further in the fridge for 1 to 2 weeks. You can eat it as is or add it to many different recipes!

    How to Store Kimchi

    Kimchi in a sealed jar in a white dish.

    After the fermentation process, kimchi needs to be stored in the refrigerator, in a covered container, for food safety purposes or it will go bad. This also slows down further fermentation.

    It is recommended to open the jar of kimchi slowly over the sink as pressure can build up in the jar from the fermentation process as gases release. You may hear a popping sound; this is normal.

    Homemade Kimchi FAQs

    How long does it take to make kimchi?

    It can take as little as 1 to 5 days for fermentation at room temperature. You can eat it at this point but it will also continue to slowly ferment as it sits in the fridge.

    What does kimchi taste like?

    Kimchi has a very strong, spicy, umami flavor. Because the cabbage is fermented, it will taste sour and tangy.

    How long does kimchi last?

    Fresh kimchi will expire if left at room temperature within a week. Storing it in the refrigerator will extend that time to 3 to 6 months. Keep in mind that as the kimchi gets older, the taste may change and become more sour and the texture may become softer. Always check for mold growth.

    Is kimchi vegan/vegetarian?

    It depends. Kimchi can contain seafood ingredients like dried shrimp, anchovies and fish sauce. If you're making it yourself, just leave out these ingredients. You can easily find vegan brands of kimchi, such as Madge's or Mother in Law's. They use ingredients like sea vegetables to get a similar flavor as the non-vegan type.

    One of my favorite vegetarian kimchi brands is Rooster. I find it has the best flavor out of the ones I've tried so far. It's imported from South Korea so you know it is authentic. What I don't like about it, is that it contains msg.

    Is kimchi keto?

    Kimchi is generally a low-carb, keto dish but always be sure to check the nutrition information if using store-bought. If making your own, leave out the sugary ingredients.

    Is kimchi gluten free?

    Yes, kimchi is gluten free.

    Where can you buy kimchi?

    You can find kimchi in Asian food markets, local farmers' markets or in the refrigerated section of the grocery store. It is also readily available online. Luckily, you won't need to worry about that if you make it at home!

    Kimchi on a fork over a jar.

    More Flavorful Kimchi Recipes to Consider

    • Kimchi hot dogs with small bowls of toppings on serving tray.
      Kimchi Hot Dogs
    • Kimchi burritos cut open and stacked with toothpick.
      Kimchi Burritos
    • Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
      Kimchi Dumplings
    • Kimchi beef stew in Asian bowl.
      Easy Kimchi Beef Stew

    If you tried this 📋 recipe tutorial for How to Make Kimchi at Home or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi in a jar and on a fork.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    How to Make Kimchi at Home

    Here I will show you, step by step, how to make kimchi at home. This homemade Korean condiment is loaded with umami flavor and is surprisingly simple to make.
    Course Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine Korean
    Prep Time 25 minutes minutes
    Fermentation Time 1 day day
    Total Time 1 day day 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 cups
    Calories 42kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 5 wide-mouth pint jars
    • 1 Large bowl
    • Colander

    Ingredients

    • 2 pounds napa cabbage about 1 large head
    • ¼ cup kosher salt
    • distilled water enough to cover the cabbage
    • 5 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger minced
    • 1 teaspoon sugar
    • 2 tablespoons fish sauce
    • 3 tablespoons gochugaru Korean red pepper powder/course ground
    • 2 tablespoons gochujang paste
    • 1 cup daikon radish peeled and grated
    • 3 green onions sliced
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Remove any damaged outer leaves from the napa cabbage and then slice it into quarters. Core the cabbage and cut it into 2" pieces.
      Napa cabbage and a chef's knife on a cutting board.
    • In a large bowl, add the cabbage pieces and salt (See Note 1).
      Chopped Napa cabbage in a large steel bowl with salt.
    • Massage the salt into the cabbage with your hands.
      Chopped Napa cabbage in a large steel bowl.
    • Add enough of the distilled water to cover the cabbage. Stir until the salt has been dissolved.
      Chopped Napa cabbage in a large steel bowl.
    • Cover the cabbage with an inverted plate and weigh it down with something heavy, like a jar/can. Let it sit for 2 hours at room temperature or up to 5 hours. This will draw out the moisture which will help preserve it and absorb the seasonings later.
      Bowl with a plate and weight on it.
    • Drain the salt water from the cabbage and rinse it under cold water. Blot with paper towel to dry it and return it to the large bowl.
      Chopped Napa cabbage in a colander.
    • To make the paste, stir the garlic, ginger, sugar, fish sauce, gochugaru and gochujang paste together until smooth.
      Kimchi spices in a small bowl with a fork.
    • Combine the cabbage with the radish and green onions.
      Cabbage, radish and green onion in a steel bowl.
    • Add the paste. Using your hands (you can use gloves), gently massage the paste into the cabbage mixture until all of the pieces are completely coated.
      Hands massaging cabbage and spices in a steel bowl.
    • Pack the kimchi into sanitized jars, pressing it down as you add it to minimize exposure to air. You want to leave about 2 inches of space at the top of the jar. To help keep the kimchi packed into the liquid, you can use some sort of weight placed on top of it (See Note 2). Wipe the jars down if needed and seal them with the lids (do not seal them tightly).
      A hand holding kimchi over a jar.
    • Place the jars in a baking dish (to help catch any juices that may overflow) and set them in an area that is cool and dark. Let the kimchi sit for at least 24 hours or up to 5 days. If you see bubbling that means it is fermenting.
      Check the kimchi once per day to press down on the vegetables with a clean spoon and make sure they stay submerged under the brine. The cabbage will slowly release more brine over time (See Note 3). After 24 hours, you can start tasting the kimchi to see if it's fermented to your liking (it will be tangy). If not, you can leave it to ferment longer.
      Kimchi in a sealed jar in a white dish.
    • The kimchi can now be stored in the refrigerator and is ready to eat (you can remove the weights and label the jar with the date). For full flavor, slowly ferment it further in the fridge for 1 to 2 weeks. You can eat it as is or add it to many different recipes!
      Kimchi in a small bowl with jars of kimchi in the background.

    Notes

    1. Make sure you use kosher or sea salt so that it is free of additives/iodine, which is believed to negatively affect the fermentation process.
    2. It's important that the cabbage stays covered in the brine for the lactic acid bacteria to multiply and to prevent mold. Fermentation weights come in handy for this or you can also use a cabbage leaf placed on top/tucked in with a weight on top of it.
    3. If you need more brine to keep the kimchi covered, you can mix 1 cup of water with 1 ¼ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt. Use some of this mixture to top it up, if needed.
    4. This recipe yields about 5 pint jars of kimchi with 2" of headspace.
    5. The temperature range I ferment my kimchi in is between 65°F/18°C to 70°F/21°C and that works out great. The cooler you keep it, the longer it takes to ferment.
    6. To make it less spicy, add less gochugaru and/or gochujang.
    7. Store the kimchi in the fridge for up to 3 to 6 months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 42kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 2162mg | Potassium: 413mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1304IU | Vitamin C: 36mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 1mg

    Baked Turnip Fries

    January 18, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    These baked turnip fries are deliciously spiced and pair well with the creamy, yogurt dipping sauce. They are an excellent low-starch and low-calorie alternative to traditional potato French fries.

    Golden turnips fries on parchment with yogurt dip on the side.

    These turnip French fries are made with simple seasonings and an herbaceous, lemon-garlic dip that complements them perfectly. I like to serve them to my kids with these homemade fish sticks with a fish stick sauce.

    You could also serve them with a variety of dips for guests including beer cheese dip, ranch dressing dip and my restaurant copycat honey dill dipping sauce.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Turnip fries ingredients labeled.
    • turnips - You are looking for large turnips that are about 4" in diameter--they will be cut into matchsticks (long, thin strips).
    • olive oil - To roast the turnip fries with.
    • herbs and spices - Dried oregano, garlic powder, onion powder, salt and pepper. For a spicy tweak, use the spice mixture from this Cajun French fries recipe.
    • fresh chives - To garnish (these are optional).
    • dip ingredients - Greek yogurt, dried dill, fresh garlic (not pictured) and fresh lemon juice (not pictured).

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Chef's Note: The recipe can also easily be made vegan by using a plant-based yogurt or sour cream in place of the Greek yogurt.

    Tips on Selecting Your Turnips

    Turnips are known for being a bit spicy, but roasting turnips mellows out their taste significantly. The hakurei turnip is one of the mildest varieties but can be on the smaller side, so they won't work well for fries.

    The purple top white globe turnips are widely available and should be easy to locate in the produce area of any grocery store. They can get quite large so you should have no problem finding suitable ones for these fries.

    How to Make Turnip Fries

    Raw turnip sticks on a large parchment-lined frying pan.

    Step 1. Prepare the turnip fries. Preheat the oven to 450°F. Add the turnip sticks to a large bowl and toss with the olive oil. Add the oregano, garlic powder, onion powder, salt and pepper. Toss until the turnips are evenly coated with the spices. Transfer the turnips to a large baking sheet and spread them out.

    Golden turnips fries on parchment-lined cutting board.

    Step 2. Bake in the preheated oven. Bake for about 30 to 40 minutes in the preheated oven, stirring halfway through, or until golden brown.

    Turnip fries dipping sauce in bowl with whisk.

    Step 3. Make the dip. For the dip, mix the yogurt, dill, garlic and lemon juice together. Season with some salt and pepper.

    Turnip fries on parchment lined cutting board with yogurt dip in a small bowl.

    Step 4. Serve. Garnish the fries with the chives and serve with the dip!

    Serving Suggestions

    Feel free to experiment with adding additional dip flavors as you see fit. You could combine some chipotles and Greek yogurt for a spicy chipotle sauce, test out my easy slow cooker buffalo chicken dip or even use a barbecue sauce or a kimchi mayo dip.

    These turnip French fries make an excellent snack on their own or could be used as a side for a larger meal. Adding cheese and other toppings would make it a whole meal, just like I do with my kimchi French fries.

    Some main dishes to serve them with include chicken fried hamburgers, pork kebabs or a blackened chicken burger.

    Turnip Fries FAQs

    How do you store the leftovers?

    You can store any leftover dipping sauce in a sealed container in the refrigerator for 1-2 days. The fries can be stored covered in the fridge for up to 1 week.

    How do you reheat them?

    Reheat the fries in the oven at 400°F on a lightly greased or parchment-lined baking sheet to restore crispiness.

    Do turnips taste like potatoes?

    They have a mild, slightly peppery flavor but when roasted become sweet and earthy and can mimic the taste and texture of potatoes.

    Are turnip fries bitter?

    Peeling and roasting the fries helps with the bitter flavor but some people might still taste a hint of bitterness.

    Golden, crispy, baked turnip fries on parchment-lined wooden board.

    More Vegetable Sides You Will Love

    • Bunch of fresh asparagus over pan.
      How to Cook Asparagus on the Stove
    • Grilled vegetables (escalivada) on clear, glass plate.
      Escalivada (Grilled Vegetables)
    • Pea purée in white dish with whole peas and olive oil on top.
      Sweet Pea Purée
    • Sauteed mushrooms and onions in white dish with fresh thyme sprigs.
      Butter Sautéed Mushrooms and Onions

    If you tried this Baked Turnip Fries Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Golden turnip fries on parchment lined serving board with dip.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Baked Turnip Fries

    These baked turnip fries are deliciously spiced and pair well with the creamy, yogurt dipping sauce. They are an excellent low-starch and low-calorie alternative to traditional potato French fries.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American, French
    Diet Low Calorie, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 96kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Baking sheet

    Ingredients

    For the Turnip Fries

    • 2 large turnips about 4" in diameter--peeled and cut into matchsticks
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 ½ teaspoons salt or to taste
    • ½ teaspoon pepper
    • chives chopped - to garnish (optional)

    For the Dipping Sauce

    • 1 cup Greek yogurt plain
    • ½ tablespoon dried dill
    • 1 teaspoon fresh garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed is best
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 450°F.
    • Add the turnip sticks to a large bowl and toss with the olive oil. Add the oregano, garlic powder, onion powder, salt and pepper. Toss until the turnips are evenly coated with the spices.
    • Transfer the turnips to a large baking sheet and spread them out.
    • Bake for about 30 to 40 minutes in the preheated oven, stirring halfway through, or until golden brown.
    • For the dip, mix the yogurt, dill, garlic and lemon juice together. Season with some salt and pepper.
    • Garnish the turnip fries with the chives and serve with the dip!

    Notes

    • Nutrition information does not include the dip.
    • You can store any leftover dipping sauce in a sealed container in the refrigerator for 1-2 days. The fries can be stored covered in the fridge for up to 1 week.
    • Reheat the fries in the oven at 400°F on a lightly greased or parchment-lined baking sheet to restore crispiness.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 935mg | Potassium: 208mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 23IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 52mg | Iron: 1mg

    Bison Bone Broth

    January 11, 2023 by Joss Dyckson 2 Comments

    Nourish your body with this homemade bison bone broth. Meaty bones, herbs and vegetables simmer for hours, infusing this broth with a rich, savory flavor.

    Bison bone broth in a small jar with dark background. Vegetables on the side.

    It's a good alternative to beef broth as well as a great way to utilize the bones of the bison, not only the meat. When I'm ordering bison from the local farmer, I just ask him to throw in a bag of mixed bison bones and keep them in the freezer until I'm ready to make this broth.

    If you enjoy bison recipes, you should also try this bison meat sauce and bison sliders.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Bison bone broth ingredients prepped on grey-brown background.
    • bison bones - preferably a mixture of bison short ribs, marrow and oxtail bones
    • dried shiitake mushrooms - adds delicious meaty flavor or you can substitute with dried porcini mushrooms, which have a more earthy flavor
    • bouquet garni - this is simply fresh herbs like bay leaves + thyme sprigs tied together with kitchen twine
    • apple cider vinegar - helps to draw minerals out of the bones while simmering (you can substitute this with wine or lemon juice)

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Bison Bone Broth

    Raw bison bones in baking pan with parchment paper.

    Step 1. Preheat the oven to 400°F. Place the bones on a large rimmed baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil.

    Roasted bison bones in baking pan with parchment paper.

    Step 2. Roast in the preheated oven for 30 minutes or until they are browned.

    Bison bone broth with vegetables in large stock pot.

    Step 3. Place the roasted bones in a stockpot. Add the vegetables, dried mushrooms, herbs, peppercorns and vinegar. Add enough cold water to cover the bones and vegetables by 1 to 2 inches.

    Bring to a boil over high heat and then reduce heat to a gentle simmer. Simmer, uncovered, for 12 hours. If the water gets too low and bones are exposed, add some more.

    Bison bone broth in jar on a wooden cutting board.

    Step 4. Remove the bones and meat from the broth using tongs. You can save the meat for other uses.

    Strain the broth through a fine-mesh strainer and then season it with salt and pepper.

    Let it cool. Transfer to jars and store in the refrigerator or freezer.

    Pro Tips

    • Roasting the bones before simmering will caramelize them, giving the broth a deeper, richer flavor, so be sure not to skip this step!
    • As it's simmering, you will start to see foam at the top of the liquid. You can skim the foam within the first hour or two to help achieve a clearer bone broth.
    • Once the bone broth cools, there will be a layer of fat on top. You can skim it off if that is your preference but I personally enjoy it.

    Ways to Use Your Homemade Bison Broth

    • You can enjoy sipping on your broth all day long to help you feel full and nourished, soothe your throat or to warm you up on a cool day.
    • Use it as a base for soup, sauce or brown gravy.
    • Try boiling rice or pasta with it instead of plain old water to add salty, savory flavor.
    • Add it to other dishes like casseroles or savory smoothies to add flavor and nutrients.
    • Dehydrate it to make bone broth powder.

    Storage

    • Never leave it out for too long because bone broth spoils quickly.
    • You can store your bison bone broth in the fridge for up to 5 days or freeze it for up to 12 months.
    • Freeze it in ice cube trays if you will be using it in small quantities or in jars for larger quantities.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is bison bone broth good for you?

    While the bones simmer they release minerals, amino acids and collagen providing numerous health benefits.

    Is it okay to drink bone broth every day?

    According to Eating Well, bone broth is generally safe to drink moderately but may not be suitable for everyone, including vegans and vegetarians.

    Bison bone broth in a small jar with dark background.

    More Bison Recipes You Will Love

    • Bison meatloaf sliced on a serving dish.
      Bison Meatloaf
    • Bison meatballs with BBQ sauce and parsley.
      Bison Meatballs
    • Bison Tacos
    • Bison chili with toppings in cast iron dish.
      Slow Cooker Bison Chili

    If you tried this Bison Bone Broth Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Bison bone broth in large pot.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Bison Bone Broth

    Nourish your body with this homemade bison bone broth. Meaty bones, herbs and vegetables simmer for hours, infusing this broth with a rich, savory flavor.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 hours hours 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 12 hours hours 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 cups
    Calories 371kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • 2 1 quart jars

    Ingredients

    • 4 pounds bison bones preferably a mixture of marrow, short rib and oxtail bones
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 2 large carrots cut into chunks
    • 1 large yellow onion peeled and quartered
    • 1 whole head garlic outer layer peeled and cut in half crosswise
    • 2 stalks celery cut into 2-inch pieces
    • ½ cup dried shiitake mushrooms or porcini
    • 1 bouquet garni bay leaves + thyme sprigs tied together with kitchen twine
    • 2 teaspoons black peppercorns
    • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
    • salt & pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Place the bones on a large rimmed baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil.
    • Roast in the preheated oven for 30 minutes or until they are browned.
    • Place the roasted bones in a stockpot. Add the vegetables, dried mushrooms, herbs, peppercorns and vinegar. Add enough cold water to cover the bones and vegetables by 1 to 2 inches.
    • Bring to a boil over high heat and then reduce heat to a gentle simmer. Simmer, uncovered, for 12 hours. If the water gets too low and bones are exposed, add some more.
    • Remove the bones and meat from the broth using tongs. You can save the meat for other uses.
    • Strain the broth through a fine-mesh strainer and then season it with salt and pepper. Let it cool. Transfer to jars and store in the refrigerator or freezer.

    Notes

    • The yield will vary.
    • As it's simmering, you will start to see foam at the top of the liquid. You can skim the foam within the first hour or two to help achieve a clearer bone broth.
    • Once the bone broth cools, there will be a layer of fat on top. You can skim it off if that is your preference.
    • Never leave it out for too long because bone broth spoils quickly. You can store your bison bone broth in the fridge for up to 5 days or freeze it for up to 12 months. Freeze it in ice cube trays if you will be using it in small quantities or in jars for larger quantities.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 371kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 24mg | Potassium: 196mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 3298IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 4mg

    Bok Choy Stir Fry

    January 4, 2023 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    This bok choy stir fry is an easy, quick and nutritious meal. The recipe calls for various ingredients like bok choy, mushrooms and chow mein noodles, giving the dish complex textures from soft to crunchy. The secret to this stir fry is the sauce: a mixture of sweet, spicy, and savory. Oh, and a whole lot of bok choy!

    Bok choy stir fry with noodles in frying pan on light background. Chopsticks, ginger root and cilantro on the side.

    🍜 Meet Your New Favorite Stir Fry Star: Bok choy

    Bok choy is a vegetable from the cabbage family along with broccoli and Brussels sprouts. It is known for its long leaf stalks and a large stem, growing up to 12 to 24 inches long.

    Bok choy tastes amazing when stir fried until tender-crisp. I love how the leaves soak up the savory sauce while the stalks stay nice and crispy. It's a nice vegetarian option and can be hearty when served with noodles.

    Store-bought stir fry sauces are much too sweet for my liking. This sauce has just the right amount of sweetness and tastes delicious!

    If you love a good crunch and umami sauce in every bite you might also like my ground beef and cabbage stir fry, kimchi udon or kimchi and tofu stir fry.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥘 Ingredients

    Bok choy stir fry ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • vegetable broth - Vegetable broth is typically vegetarian so it's great if you're following a vegetarian diet. However, it's always a good idea to check the label if you're buying pre-made vegetable broth. Some commercial brands might include additives or flavorings that aren't vegetarian. Though it's rare, I have seen it.
    • honey (not pictured) - Can substitute with agave nectar which is vegan.
    • chow mein noodles - I like to buy fresh chow mein noodles from the deli because they cook quickly but you can also use dried.
    • mushrooms - I suggest button, cremini, portobello or oyster but feel free to pick your favorite.
    • baby bok choy - Baby bok choy is usually about 3-6 inches long. It is sweeter than regular bok choy, which is slightly bitter.
    • cornstarch - To thicken the sauce up.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    📖 Substitutions

    • If you wish to substitute or add more vegetables, here are some suggestions: Since the bok choy is part of the cabbage family, anything from that family should work nicely. Napa cabbage is one of the best choices for its Asian roots and similar texture to bok choy.
    • If you prefer more of a variety, you can add some broccoli for its deep color and ability to soak up the sauce. Add some brighter colors with bell peppers or carrots.
    • If you want vegetables that cook faster, baby spinach or snap peas are great whether they are cooked or raw. Sliced water chestnuts will add some crunch.
    • Chow mein noodles are excellent in this stir fry, but you can also try ramen noodles, udon or rice noodles.
    • As for the sauce, it also tastes amazing with any of these tofu stir fry marinades.

    🔪 How to Stir Fry Bok Choy

    Bok choy stir fry sauce in bowl with whisk and baby bok choy on the side.

    Step 1. Make the sauce. Whisk the stir fry sauce ingredients together and set aside.

    Cooked chow mein noodles in colander.

    Step 2. Cook the noodles. Cook the chow mein noodles according to package directions and reserve.

    Bok choy, red peppers and mushrooms in wok.

    Step 3. Cook the veg. Heat peanut oil in a large skillet over medium-high. Add peppers, mushrooms and bok choy, then stir-fry until just tender.

    Bok choy stir fry with noodles and tongs in wok.

    Step 4. Add noodles and sauce. Add the noodles and sauce to the pan, then toss everything together until nicely coated.

    Chef's Note: If you have a wok, you can use that instead of a frying pan. It's great for stir fries! I especially use one for larger stir fries like this and my veggie quinoa stir fry.

    Bok choy noodle stir fry in wok with stir fry sauce.

    Step 5. Thicken sauce. Stir together cornstarch and cool water, then add to the pan and cook until the sauce thickens.

    Bok choy stir fry in pan with chopsticks.

    Step 6. Serve. Serve the bok choy noodle stir fry and enjoy!

    💭 Joss' Top Tip

    Here is a fun fact: did you know that bok choy can be used as an edible spoon? Be sure to save a stalk and use it for future soups. Once you're done with your spoon, you can eat it and not worry about dishes!

    🥗 Side Dish Suggestions

    • For a side, I recommend a broth-based soup like this vegetarian kimchi tofu soup or a Chinese hot and sour soup. It adds spice, it's light, and you can use your bok choy spoon as I mentioned earlier.
    • If you need more protein, try adding sliced chicken breast or cubed tofu. For best results and some tips, check out how to fry tofu cubes.
    • Try these kimchi pork dumplings.

    🌡️ Bok Choy Stir Fry FAQs

    How do you clean it?

    After trimming the base slightly, soak in cool water for a few minutes, lift them out and rinse with more cool water. Pat dry with a clean towel so that it sears nicely.

    How do you chop/prep bok choy for stir fries?

    To cut the baby bok choy for this stir fry, you simply slice it in half and it's the perfect size. Or you can use regular bok choy, chopped into smaller pieces.

    How long do leftovers last?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. I don't recommend freezing leftovers.

    How do you reheat it?

    Simply reheat the bok choy stir fry in a pan over medium heat or in the microwave. The pan is ideal to avoid sogginess.

    Bok choy stir fry with noodles in frying pan.

    🥬 More Green Vegetable Recipes to Try

    • Glazed tofu with fresh herbs in bowl.
      Electric Skillet Glazed Tofu
    • Pea purée in white dish with whole peas and olive oil on top.
      Sweet Pea Purée
    • Grilled broccoli on plate with tongs.
      How to Grill Broccoli
    • Bunch of fresh asparagus over pan.
      How to Cook Asparagus on the Stove

    If you tried this Bok Choy Stir Fry Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Bok choy stir fry in frying pan.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Bok Choy Stir Fry

    This bok choy stir fry is an easy, quick and nutritious meal! The secret to this stir fry is the sauce: a mixture of sweet, spicy, and savory. Oh, and a whole lot of bok choy!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Chinese
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 18 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 482kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Wok

    Ingredients

    For the Stir Fry Sauce

    • ½ cup vegetable broth
    • ⅓ cup soy sauce
    • 2 tablespoons liquid honey or agave nectar
    • 2 teaspoons sesame oil
    • 2 tablespoons fresh ginger minced
    • 3 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon white sesame seeds

    For the Stir Fry

    • 12 ounces chow mein noodles
    • 1 tablespoon peanut oil
    • 1 cup red bell pepper sliced
    • 1 cup mushrooms sliced
    • 6 cups baby bok choy cleaned and sliced in half
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    • 1 tablespoon cool water
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Whisk all stir fry sauce ingredients together. Reserve.
    • Cook the chow mein noodles according to package directions. Reserve.
      12 ounces chow mein noodles
    • In a large skillet or wok, add the peanut oil and heat over medium-high heat.
      1 tablespoon peanut oil
    • Add the red bell peppers, mushrooms and bok choy. Cook, stirring often, for about 4 minutes (until fork-tender).
      1 cup red bell pepper, 1 cup mushrooms, 6 cups baby bok choy
    • Add the reserved chow mein noodles to the skillet with the veggies.
    • Add the reserved sauce and toss to combine. The noodles and vegetables should be coated with the sauce.
    • Combine 1 tablespoon cornstarch with 1 tablespoon cool water in a small bowl and add it to the stir fry. Continue to cook until the sauce thickens.
    • Serve and enjoy!

    Notes

    • Edible spoon: Bok choy can be used as an edible spoon. Be sure to save a stalk and use it for future soups. Once you're done with your spoon, you can eat it and not worry about dishes!
    • Bok choy vs. baby bok choy: I use baby bok choy, which is usually about 3-6 inches long. It is sweeter than regular bok choy, which is slightly bitter. To cut the baby bok choy for this stir fry, you simply slice it in half and it's the perfect size. Or you can use regular bok choy, chopped into smaller pieces.
    • To clean bok choy: After trimming the base slightly, soak in cool water for a few minutes, lift them out and rinse with more cool water. Pat dry with a clean towel so that it sears nicely.
    • For vegetarians: Vegetable broth is typically vegetarian so it's great if you're following a vegetarian diet. However, it's always a good idea to check the label if you're buying pre-made vegetable broth. Some commercial brands might include additives or flavorings that aren't vegetarian. Though it's rare, I have seen it.
    • Fridge storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 482kcal | Carbohydrates: 83g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1964mg | Potassium: 223mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 17021IU | Vitamin C: 209mg | Calcium: 422mg | Iron: 6mg

    Kimchi Dumplings

    December 28, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    These pork and kimchi dumplings are a fun dish for their small but numerous servings of pork, kimchi and onion wrapped in a delicate, folded dough. The quick dipping sauce adds the perfect punch of flavor to these savory dumplings.

    Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce, small bowl of kimchi on the side.

    These Asian dumplings can be served as an appetizer or main dish any time of the year, depending on what you're going for.

    I created this recipe because I've been experimenting with kimchi in fusion dishes such as my kimchi chowder, easy kimchi carbonara and kimchi burritos. And I have to say, it tastes amazing wrapped up in a dumpling.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥟 Ingredients

    Kimchi dumpling ingredients labeled on light blue background.
    • ground pork - Many dumpling recipes will use a raw ground pork filling and let it cook in the steamer. In this recipe, I cook the pork first with the onions before filling the wrappers, giving it a slightly different taste and texture.
    • Korean kimchi - Here is a recipe for how to make kimchi or you can buy it in-store.
    • dumpling wrappers - You can find these premade in the reach-in refrigerators or frozen section of the supermarket.
    • sesame oil - Toasted sesame oil will give amazing flavor to the dipping sauce.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    🥢 Equipment

    • bamboo steamer - To cook the dumplings.
    • parchment liners - You can buy them online or cut your own.

    🔪 How to Make Kimchi Dumplings

    Kimchi dumpling pork filling in frying pan.

    Step 1. Make the filling. Add the ground pork, yellow onions, green onions, and soy sauce to a medium-size frying pan over medium heat. Fry it until the pork is fully cooked, breaking it up into small pieces as it cooks. Remove from heat and stir in the diced kimchi.

    Dumpling wrapper with kimchi filling and woman's hand dabbing the wrapped with water.

    Step 2. Fill the dumpling wrappers. Place a small spoonful of filling in the center of a wrapper. Dip your finger into some water and dab around the whole edge of the wrapper.

    Folded, raw kimchi dumpling in woman's hand.

    Step 3. Fold. Fold and pleat the edges together, making sure to seal them well. Repeat for the rest of the wrappers.

    Raw kimchi dumplings in bamboo steamer.

    Step 4. Add dumplings to steamer. Line a bamboo steamer with round, perforated parchment paper liners. Arrange the dumplings inside, being careful not to overcrowd them.

    👩🏻‍🍳 Chef's Note: If you don't want to purchase the liners, you can simply cut some parchment into circles yourself and poke holes in them to let steam through.

    Bamboo steamer in frying pan with water.

    Step 5. Prepare steamer. Cover with the lid and place in a wide skillet on the stove. Fill the skillet with water (just enough for the water to submerge the bottom rim of the bamboo steamer, but no higher). Bring the water to a boil and then lower the heat to medium.

    Kimchi dumplings cooked in bamboo steamer.

    Step 6. Steam the dumplings. Steam the dumplings for about 10 minutes, until the dough is cooked. Keep an eye on the water level and add more boiling water as needed.

    Kimchi dumpling sauce in small bowl with limes on the side.

    Step 7. Make the dumpling sauce. In a small bowl, whisk the soy sauce, lime juice, sesame oil and ginger together.

    An open dumpling held in chopsticks.

    Step 8. Serve. Serve the kimchi dumplings immediately with the dipping sauce. Garnish with fresh, sliced green onions if desired.

    ✔️ Joss' Tips

    When cooking your kimchi dumplings, be sure to use parchment inserts or liners with small holes in them.

    Parchment inserts are important because they keep the dumplings from sticking at the bottom, whether you are using a bamboo steamer or a metal steamer (good substitute for bamboo steamer).

    As you're filling and folding, keep the dumpling wrappers under a damp, clean kitchen towel so that they don't dry out.

    As you can see, there are many ways to fold dumplings, but here are some of the most popular and easiest:

    • The half-moon, the easiest and most common one, is folded in half and sealed (like a perogy). If you are new to dumpling folding, you may want to start with this one.
    • The two-pleat is folded in half with two pleats meeting at the middle.
    • The one-directional pleat (method 3 in the video) has pleats throughout the dumpling line, all facing one way. This is one of my favorite ways.

    🌡️ Raw & Cooked Dumpling Storage Tips

    Speaking of storage, the cooked dumplings can last up to 4 days in the fridge in a covered container.

    Their size and uniformity also make freezing easy. These Korean kimchi dumplings can be frozen raw or cooked and last up to 3 months in the freezer. However, there are certain steps to follow, as outlined in my easy pierogies recipe.

    Frozen kimchi dumplings on sheet pan.
    1. First, let them cool completely if they are cooked.
    2. Next, be sure to freeze them, without them touching, on a parchment-lined cookie sheet in one layer; this will keep the dumplings from freezing together.
    3. After they are frozen solid, put them in a freezer-safe container or bag and back into the freezer.

    ❓ Kimchi Dumplings FAQs

    What are kimchi dumplings made of?

    Kimchi dumplings consist of a ground pork filling with Korean kimchi and various seasonings wrapped inside a pouch of dumpling dough.

    What to eat with kimchi dumplings?

    If you're serving them as an appetizer or main you can try noodles, kimchi fried rice, stir fry, kimchi soup, green salad and similar dishes.

    How do you reheat them?

    If you want to reheat cooked kimchi dumplings, you can take some out and steam, pan-fry or microwave them. If they are frozen, they are best if cooked directly from frozen because thawing them first can make them soggy and difficult to work with.

    A tray of kimchi dumplings with chopsticks and Asian dipping sauce on the side.

    💜 More Kimchi Recipes to Try

    • Kimchi in a bowl.
      28 of Our Best Kimchi Recipes
    • Kimchi cod tacos in serving dish.
      Kimchi Tacos
    • Kimchi grilled cheese sandwiches stacked on serving tray with skewer.
      Kimchi Grilled Cheese Sandwiches
    • Kimchi pancakes stacked on top of each other.
      Kimchi Pancakes

    If you tried this 🥢🥟 Kimchi Dumplings Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Kimchi dumplings arranged on plate with dipping sauce.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Kimchi Dumplings

    These kimchi dumplings are a fun dish consisting of pork, kimchi and onion wrapped in a delicate, folded dough and a quick dipping sauce.
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Side Dish
    Cuisine Korean
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 32 dumplings
    Calories 42kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Bamboo steamer
    • Parchment liners

    Ingredients

    For the Dumplings

    • 1 cup ground pork
    • ¼ cup yellow onion diced
    • ¼ cup green onions sliced
    • 1 tablespoon soy sauce
    • ½ cup kimchi diced finely
    • 32 dumpling wrappers approximately

    For the Dipping Sauce

    • 3 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 1 tablespoon lime juice
    • 1 tablespoon sesame oil
    • 1 teaspoon ginger peeled and grated
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    To Prepare the Dumplings

    • Heat a medium-size frying pan over medium heat. Add the ground pork, yellow onions, green onions, and soy sauce to the pan. Fry the pork, breaking it up into small pieces as it cooks. Once the pork is fully cooked (after about 5 minutes), remove from heat and stir in the diced kimchi.
      1 cup ground pork, ¼ cup yellow onion, ¼ cup green onions, 1 tablespoon soy sauce, ½ cup kimchi
    • Place a small spoonful of filling in the center of a wrapper. Dip your finger into some water and dab around the whole edge of the wrapper. Fold and pleat the edges together, making sure to seal them well. Repeat for the rest of the wrappers.
      32 dumpling wrappers

    To Steam the Dumplings

    • Line a bamboo steamer with round, perforated parchment paper liners (or you can just poke holes into parchment yourself). Arrange the dumplings inside, being careful not to overcrowd them. Cover with the lid and place in a wide skillet on the stove.
    • Fill the skillet with water (just enough for the water to submerge the bottom rim of the bamboo steamer, but no higher).
    • Bring the water to a boil and then lower the heat to medium.
    • Steam the dumplings for about 10 minutes, until the dough is cooked. Keep an eye on the water level and add more boiling water as needed.

    For the Dipping Sauce

    • In a small bowl, whisk the soy sauce, lime juice, sesame oil and ginger together.
      3 tablespoons soy sauce, 1 tablespoon lime juice, 1 tablespoon sesame oil, 1 teaspoon ginger

    To Serve

    • Serve the dumplings immediately with the dipping sauce. Garnish with fresh, sliced green onions if desired.

    Video

    Notes

    • Note on nutrition info: The nutrition information does not include the dipping sauce.
    • Yield: This recipe yields about 32 dumplings using wrappers that are around 3 ¼ to 3 ½ inches in diameter.
    • Fridge storage: The cooked dumplings can last up to 4 days covered in the fridge. If you want to reheat them later, you can take some out and steam, pan-fry or microwave them.
    • Freezing: These kimchi dumplings can be frozen raw or cooked and last up to 3 months in the freezer. They are best if cooked from frozen because thawing them first can make them soggy and difficult to work with.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 42kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 87mg | Potassium: 34mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 11IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    Grandma's Scrambled Eggs

    December 23, 2022 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Why do Grandma's scrambled eggs always taste better? Although she makes it entirely by memory, I just had to get it down on paper. This delicious scramble has colorful veggies, smoky bacon, creamy, melted cheese and a touch of spice!

    Scrambled eggs in cast iron pan with sliced green onions and grated cheese in small bowls on the side.

    Scrambled egg creations tend to run in the family, thanks to Grandma. Her grandson makes these delicious hamburger scrambled eggs and my husband and I created these kimchi scrambled eggs.

    You can definitely taste the love in this special breakfast that we are served almost every morning that we stay at the Grandparents' house, along with her electric skillet pancakes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    • eggs - Large eggs are what Grandma uses.
    • olive oil - You can substitute with butter if desired.
    • bell pepper - Mixed colors.
    • celery - Adds delicious crunch.
    • bacon - Bacon is optional but I love it with bacon.
    • cheddar cheese - Can use regular or sharp cheddar.
    • cayenne pepper powder - Grandma grows, dries and grinds her own.

    *Check recipe card for full ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Grandma's Scrambled Eggs

    1. Whisk the eggs. Whisk the eggs in a bowl and set aside.
    2. Sauté vegetables and bacon. Heat the olive oil in a nonstick frying pan over medium heat. Add the vegetables and bacon and sauté until the vegetables are softened and bacon is cooked, about 4 to 5 minutes.
    3. Add the eggs. Turn the heat down to medium-low and add the eggs. Stir with a spatula as it cooks. When the eggs are about half cooked, add the cayenne, salt and pepper.
    4. Cook. Continue cooking and stirring until the eggs are still soft but almost fully cooked. Add the shredded cheese and stir until the cheese is melted.
    5. Serve. Remove from heat and serve immediately.
    Scrambled eggs on white plate with a fork.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Grandma serves scrambled eggs with pancakes or waffles, a skillet breakfast hash and ham, but you don't have to go big like Grandma.
    • These are perfect on their own or on toast.
    • Wash it down with some homemade orange Julius or milk.
    • If you're looking for condiments that suit this dish, try my green hot sauce or Filipino banana ketchup.

    Storage

    Scrambled eggs can last up to 4 days in the fridge in an airtight container. If you want to reheat them, pop them in the microwave, a low oven or back in the pan.

    Scrambled eggs in cast iron pan with grated cheese in the background.

    More Delicious Egg Recipes to Try

    • Runny poached eggs on an English muffin with mock bearnaise sauce.
      Poached Eggs with Mock Béarnaise Sauce
    • Pickled eggs in jar and sliced open in a bowl.
      Easy Pickled Eggs
    • Spinach egg bites on plate with Greek yogurt.
      Cake Pop Maker Spinach & Mozza Egg Bites
    • Raw egg in plastic bag held by hand.
      How to Sous Vide Eggs

    If you tried 🍳 Grandma's Scrambled Eggs Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Grandma's scrambled eggs with cheese and veggies in cast iron pan.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Grandma's Scrambled Eggs

    Grandma's delicious scrambled eggs have colorful veggies, smoky bacon, creamy, melted cheese and a touch of spice! You can definitely feel the love.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine Canadian
    Diet Gluten Free
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 2
    Calories 340kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Frying pan

    Ingredients

    • 5 large eggs
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ¼ cup bell pepper diced--mixed colors
    • 2 tablespoons celery diced
    • 1 green onion chopped
    • 2 tablespoons bacon diced--optional
    • ¼ cup cheddar cheese shredded
    • 1 pinch cayenne pepper
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Whisk the eggs in a bowl and set aside.
      5 large eggs
    • Heat the olive oil in a nonstick frying pan over medium heat. Add the vegetables and bacon and sauté until the vegetables are softened and bacon is cooked, about 4 to 5 minutes.
      1 tablespoon olive oil, ¼ cup bell pepper, 2 tablespoons celery, 1 green onion, 2 tablespoons bacon
    • Turn the heat down to medium-low and add the eggs. Stir with a spatula as it cooks.
    • When the eggs are about half cooked, add the cayenne, salt and pepper.
      1 pinch cayenne pepper
    • Continue cooking and stirring until the eggs are still soft but almost fully cooked. Add the shredded cheese and stir until the cheese is melted.
      ¼ cup cheddar cheese
    • Remove from heat and serve immediately.

    Notes

    • If you are using bacon bits instead of raw bacon, add them with the cheese instead.
    • Scrambled eggs can last up to 4 days in the fridge in an airtight container.
    • If you want to reheat them, pop them in the microwave, a low oven or back in the pan.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 340kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 479mg | Sodium: 402mg | Potassium: 271mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1516IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 186mg | Iron: 2mg

    Slow Cooker Bison Roast

    December 21, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Enjoy your family or holiday dinner in a more unique way with this juicy, nutritious, and delicious, slow cooker bison roast recipe. It's cooked in a crockpot with various vegetables such as cabbage, chickpeas, carrots and potatoes.

    Sliced bison roast on a white serving dish with vegetables. Christmas candle in the background.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    A Unique Holiday Feast

    Instead of turkey or ham, I like to switch things up for Christmas with this vegetable-loaded, hearty bison roast. It is just as giving in its nutrition as the holiday it is made for.

    While beef pot roast has more marbling, bison is leaner, helping you feel less stuffed at the end of the night.

    Besides, you're going to need room for all of those delicious Christmas treats afterwards: Christmas cake pops, Christmas cookies, marzipan balls, etc.

    It will take only a small amount of prep to sear the roast before putting it in the crock pot, but it will make the bison roast especially flavorful.

    You can check out more festive Christmas recipes here.

    Ingredients

    Bison chuck roast ingredients labeled.
    • canned chickpeas - Chickpeas mixed in give an extra boost of protein and some texture contrast.
    • green cabbage - You can substitute with red/purple cabbage in this dinner recipe but it doesn't look as appetizing when cooked in the slow cooker.
    • potatoes - Yukon Gold (yellow) are my favorite. You can use russet if desired.
    • bison roast - You will need a chuck roast. Searing the roast before slow-cooking it caramelizes the roast, deepening the color and flavor.
    • peanut oil - Peanut oil is great for searing because it has a high smoke point and gives a faint nutty aroma if made with roasted nuts. It may not be chestnuts roasting, but peanut oil gives a subtle nuttiness that enhances the flavor of the dish. However, if someone joining in on the meal has a nut allergy, you will need to avoid using it and opt for something like canola oil instead.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Prepare the Bison Roast

    Vegetables in slow cooker.

    Step 1. Add vegetables. Arrange the chickpeas, carrots, cabbage and potatoes in the slow cooker and season them.

    Vegetables and seared bison chuck roast in slow cooker.

    Step 2. Sear the roast. Pat the bison roast dry with some paper towel and generously season the whole roast. Sear the roast in a large skillet until it is browned on all sides. Place the roast on top of the vegetables in the slow cooker.

    Vegetables, bison roast and onions in slow cooker.

    Step 3. Cook onions and garlic. Cook the onions over medium heat for 4 minutes. Add the garlic and cook for 1 more minute. Transfer to the slow cooker.

    Bison roast, vegetables, herbs and sauce in slow cooker.

    Step 4. Add broth. Whisk the tomato paste with the vegetable broth and add it to the slow cooker along with the thyme and bay leaves.

    Bison pot roast with vegetables in slow cooker.

    Step 5. Cook. Cover and cook on high for 6 hours or low for 8 to 10 hours, until the meat is tender. Remove the thyme sprigs and bay leaves.

    Sliced bison roast on a white serving dish with vegetables. Christmas candle and decorations on the side.

    Step 6. Slice and serve. Slice and serve the Christmas roast!

    Joss' Top Tip

    If you don't like your carrots and potatoes to be too soft, you can add them during the last 3 hours on high or last 4 hours on low.

    Food and Drink Pairing

    This bison roast may have a lot of food in the slow cooker, but that does not mean you cannot add more food and drink on the side to complement it.

    • Since bison is a red meat, it is best to have a 🍷 red wine with this meal such as Cabernet Sauvignon, Merlot or Shiraz. This red wine glogg (a variation of mulled wine) is perfect for the holidays.
    • For a holiday-themed cocktail option, you may want to try this cranberry-flavored Moscow mule.
    • If you do not like alcohol, cranberry juice is a great substitute, and it still fits with the holiday flavors. I also love serving this 🍹 large batch Shirley Temple recipe because both kids and adults LOVE it.
    • As for some side dishes, 🥗 Christmas green salad, roasted green beans, turnip fries and white asparagus all complement this dish perfectly.
    • For dessert, you will love this date and walnut Christmas cake.

    Bison Roast FAQs

    How long does leftover bison pot roast last in the fridge?

    Leftover roast and vegetables should be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

    Can you freezer the leftovers?

    Yes! Bison roast can be frozen for up to 2 months, but make sure you let the roast cool completely first.

    What is the best way to cook bison meat?

    A bison chuck roast is best braised or seared and slow cooked in liquid, for meltingly tender meat.

    Why is bison meat so tough?

    If your bison chuck roast is tough, it might need to be cooked longer until tender and can pull apart with a fork easily.

    Sliced bison roast on a white serving dish with Christmas decorations.

    More Juicy Bison Recipes to Try

    • Bison bone broth in large pot.
      Bison Bone Broth
    • BBQ bison short ribs on plate.
      Bison Short Ribs
    • Bison brisket nachos in cast iron pan.
      Bison Brisket Nachos
    • Bison meatballs with BBQ sauce and parsley.
      Bison Meatballs

    If you tried this 🍖 Slow Cooker Bison Roast Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Sliced bison roast on white serving dish with vegetables.
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Slow Cooker Bison Roast

    Enjoy your family, Thanksgiving or Christmas dinner in a more unique way with this juicy and delicious, slow cooker bison roast. It's cooked in a crockpot with various vegetables such as cabbage, chickpeas, carrots and potatoes.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 hours hours 23 minutes minutes
    Total Time 6 hours hours 38 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 652kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Slow cooker
    • Large frying pan

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups canned chickpeas drained and rinsed (1 can)
    • 2 cups carrots peeled and chopped into large pieces
    • ¼ small head green cabbage cored
    • 4 small Yukon gold potatoes cleaned and quartered
    • 2 ½ to 3 pound bison chuck roast
    • 2 tablespoons peanut oil
    • 1 cup yellow onions sliced
    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
    • ½ cup vegetable broth
    • 1 sprig fresh thyme
    • 2 bay leaves
    • salt and pepper
    • chopped fresh parsley to garnish (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Arrange the chickpeas, carrots, cabbage and potatoes in the slow cooker*. Season the vegetables with some salt and pepper.
      2 cups canned chickpeas, 2 cups carrots, ¼ small head green cabbage, 4 small Yukon gold potatoes
    • Pat the roast dry with some paper towel and generously season the whole roast with salt and pepper.
      2 ½ to 3 pound bison chuck roast
    • Heat the peanut oil in a large skillet (cast iron works great) over medium-high heat. Sear the roast until it is browned on all sides, a few minutes per side. Place the roast on top of the vegetables in the slow cooker.
      2 tablespoons peanut oil
    • Reduce the pan heat to medium. Add the onions and cook, stirring constantly, for 4 minutes. Add the garlic and cook for 1 more minute. Transfer the onions and garlic to the slow cooker.
      1 cup yellow onions, 2 cloves garlic
    • Whisk the tomato paste with the vegetable broth and add it to the slow cooker. Add the thyme and bay leaves.
      3 tablespoons tomato paste, ½ cup vegetable broth, 1 sprig fresh thyme, 2 bay leaves
    • Cover and cook on high for 6 hours or low for 8 to 10 hours. The meat should be tender and fall apart. Remove the thyme sprigs and bay leaves.
    • Slice and serve! If desired, you can garnish the dish with chopped parsley.

    Notes

    • Note on vegetables: *If you don't like your carrots and potatoes to be too soft, you can add them during the last 3 hours on high or last 4 hours on low.
    • Fridge storage: Leftover roast and vegetables should be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
    • Freezer storage: Leftovers can be frozen for up to 2 months, but make sure you let the roast cool completely first.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 652kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 72g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 176mg | Sodium: 666mg | Potassium: 2351mg | Fiber: 13g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 11056IU | Vitamin C: 76mg | Calcium: 141mg | Iron: 11mg

    Easy Homemade Christmas Cookies

    December 14, 2022 by Joss Dyckson Leave a Comment

    Treat your friends, family and relatives this year with a plate of colorful, easy, homemade Christmas cookies. Bright red-and-green M&Ms, tiny marshmallows and Christmas sprinkles sparkle in the glow of your holiday lights. These festive cookies take less than 30 minutes to make. They are crispy on the outside with a chewy interior!

    Christmas cookies stacked on light background.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Best Christmas Cookies For Sharing

    • They are one of the best options for bringing shareable treats to Christmas parties, potlucks and exchanges. They provide a fun, colorful, sweet bite after a joyous holiday meal and are easy to transport.
    • Once you've made a batch for yourself, you can offer Christmas cookies as holiday gifts. Wrap a few cookies in plastic packaging tied with a bow, or stack them in a jar with a festive ribbon.
    • Gift the cookies with tea, chocolate chip cookie mix in a jar or chocolate covered spoons so that your recipients can enjoy a hot drink with dessert.
    • For parties, serve these cookies on a festive plate with other snacks, such as candy canes, chocolate coated coffee beans, old fashioned butter tarts and white chocolate cake pops.
    • Best of all, these are freezer friendly. Make a large batch during the holiday season, wrap them well and then freeze them. Enjoy them all holiday long and possibly into the new year!

    Ingredients

    Christmas cookies ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • butter - I love using butter in cookies for its rich, creamy flavor. It will give the cookies a slightly crispy texture around the edges.
    • shortening - Shortening is 100% fat, unlike butter, which contains both fat and water, so it prevents the cookies from spreading flat and gives cookies a softer center. I like to do a mix of shortening and butter to create the ideal texture, flavor, and structure.
    • white sugar - White sugar leads to crispier cookies than with brown sugar. It also adds neutral sweetness so that it doesn't interfere with all of those flavors coming from the Christmas candies added to the dough.
    • eggs - I use large eggs.
    • flour - I use all-purpose flour for these cookies.
    • baking powder - To help them rise and become light and airy.
    • salt - To enhance the flavor.
    • red and green M&Ms - You should be able to find them in season in stores and online.
    • mini marshmallows - The dehydrated kind that you see in hot chocolate mixes.
    • Christmas sprinkles - If you do some searching, you can find elaborate sprinkles, such as edible glitter and sprinkles shaped like Christmas ornaments or sprinkles with festive colors.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    How to Make Christmas Cookies

    Christmas cookie dough in a bowl with a spoon.

    Step 1. Make the cookie dough. Preheat oven to 375°F. In a large bowl, combine the butter and shortening with an electric hand mixer or stand mixer.

    Add the sugar and combine until light and fluffy. Mix in the eggs, one at a time.

    In a separate bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder and salt. Add the flour mixture to the butter mixture and stir to combine. Mix in the m & m's, mini marshmallows and sprinkles.

    Christmas cookie dough balls on a parchment lined baking sheet, with Christmas cookie cutters and rolling pin on the side.

    Step 2. Bake the Christmas cookies. Scoop tablespoon-size balls of cookie dough onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, spaced at least 1" apart.

    Bake in the preheated oven for about 10 to 11 minutes. They will be golden on the bottom and have a few cracks on top. Let them sit in the pan for 1 minute before transferring to a baking rack (so that they don't fall apart).

    Let cool and serve!

    Christmas cookies on a serving tray with Christmas decorations.

    Pro Tip

    If desired, before baking, you can place a few more m & m's, marshmallows and sprinkles on top (gently press them in to the cookie dough) so that they are more visible!

    Christmas Cookies FAQs

    How long can you store Christmas cookies at room temperature?

    You can store these holiday cookies at room temperature for up to 2 to 3 weeks. Use an airtight container so that the cookies don't get stale and hard.

    Can you store Christmas cookies in the fridge?

    Yes, and they will last longer. Store them in the fridge for up to 2 months.

    Can you freeze them?

    Absolutely, when it comes to Christmas cookies, I think freeze-ability is a must! They can last up to eight to twelve months if you freeze them.

    Christmas cookies on a serving tray with a candle, rolling pin and cookie cutters in the background.

    More Holiday Recipes For Sharing

    • Chocolate mug cake mix in a red mug with Christmas gift label.
      Food Gift Recipe: Fudgy Chocolate Mug Cake
    • Marzipan ball dusted in icing sugar.
      Marzipan Balls
    • Gingerbread cake pops/balls on decorated plate.
      Gingerbread Cake Pops
    • Chocolate truffles in a white dish.
      Gourmet Dark Chocolate Truffles

    If you tried this Easy Homemade Christmas Cookies Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Christmas cookies on serving tray.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Homemade Christmas Cookies

    Treat your friends, family and relatives this year with a plate of colorful, easy, homemade Christmas cookies filled with bright red-and-green M&Ms, tiny marshmallows and festive sprinkles!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 55 cookies
    Calories 104kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric mixer

    Ingredients

    • ¾ cup butter softened
    • ⅓ cup shortening
    • 1 ½ cups white sugar
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 ⅓ cups flour
    • 1 tablespoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup red and green M&Ms
    • 1 cup mini marshmallows
    • ½ cup Christmas sprinkles
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 375°F. Line a cookie sheet with parchment paper. In a large bowl, combine the butter and shortening with an electric hand mixer or stand mixer.
      ¾ cup butter, ⅓ cup shortening
    • Add the sugar and combine until light and fluffy. Mix in the eggs, one at a time.
      1 ½ cups white sugar, 2 large eggs
    • In a separate bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder and salt. Add the flour mixture to the butter mixture and stir to combine.
      2 ⅓ cups flour, 1 tablespoon baking powder, ½ teaspoon salt
    • Mix in the m & m's, mini marshmallows and sprinkles.
      1 cup red and green M&Ms, 1 cup mini marshmallows, ½ cup Christmas sprinkles
    • Scoop tablespoon-size balls of cookie dough onto the baking sheet, spaced at least 1" apart. If desired, you can place a few more m & m's, marshmallows and sprinkles on top (gently press them in) so that they're visible.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for about 10 to 11 minutes. They will be golden on the bottom and have a few cracks on top. Let them sit in the pan for 1 minute before transferring to a baking rack (so that they don't fall apart).
    • Let cool and serve!

    Notes

    • Cookies can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2 to 3 weeks, in the fridge for up to 2 months or in the freezer for up to 8 to 12 months.
    • Once you've made a batch for yourself, you can offer Christmas cookies as holiday gifts. They are one of the best options for bringing shareable treats to Christmas parties, potlucks and exchanges. Wrap a few cookies in plastic packaging tied with a bow, or stack them in a jar with a festive ribbon.
    • For parties, serve these cookies on a festive plate with other snacks and Christmas candy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 47mg | Potassium: 31mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 96IU | Vitamin C: 0.02mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    Homemade Christmas Sprinkles

    December 7, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 1 Comment

    Why buy Christmas sprinkles from the store when you can make your own at home? It is actually incredibly easy. With this recipe, you can have festive red, green and white sprinkles on hand to use in a myriad of different holiday desserts.

    Red, green and white sprinkles in a small jar with a red ribbon and a spoon on the side.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    D.I.Y. Holiday Sprinkles: Festive, Edible, and Easy!

    • Christmas sprinkles take only 20 minutes of prep time to make!
    • They are one hundred percent edible and can be used in any way that you would normally use store-bought sprinkles.
    • You can also experiment with different colors and flavors, giving them your own personal touch.
    • You can decorate the container with ribbons and turn them into a fun food gift idea for family and friends!
    • They make great toppings for Christmas cookies, cupcakes, Christmas bundt cake or any other form of Christmas baking such as these gingerbread cake balls.
    • They could even be used as toppings for drinks like hot chocolate, DIY hot chocolate spoons or cocktails.
    • These sprinkles are gluten free and vegan, making them suitable for gluten free and vegan cupcakes.

    SUMMARIZE & SAVE THIS CONTENT ON

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Perplexity
    Grok

    Ingredients & Tools

    Christmas candy sprinkles ingredients labeled on light background.
    • powdered sugar - Powdered sugar is the main ingredient in Christmas baking sprinkles.
    • light corn syrup - You can substitute with agave nectar if preferred.
    • flavoring extract - This is optional but highly recommended. You can go with basic vanilla extract or you can pick another holiday flavor like peppermint or cinnamon.
    • red and green food coloring - Liquid and gel color both work.
    • wax paper - You will need this to let the Christmas candy sprinkles dry on.
    • piping bags - To pipe the mixture onto the wax paper in lines, dots and other shapes.
    • #4 Wilton tip - You can also go smaller (with a #3 tip) depending on how large you want your Christmas sprinkles to be. Keep in mind that with a smaller tip, the mixture will be harder to pipe but it is doable.

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Recipe Tweaks

    • Colors: You can experiment with adding varying amounts of dye to create unique shades of sprinkles. Of course, you may also opt to make additional batches with some other colors that you associate with the holiday, such as blue and white.
    • Flavors: You can experiment with flavors as much as you can colors. Instead of vanilla extract, you may want to try peppermint, cinnamon or other holiday flavors.

    How to Make Christmas Candy Sprinkles

    Frosting mixture in small bowl with spoon.

    Step 1. Combine Ingredients. Lay a few pieces of wax paper out on the counter. Combine the powdered sugar, cornstarch, water, syrup and extract together until smooth and divide the mix into three bowls.

    Colored Christmas sprinkle mixtures in small bowls.

    Step 2. Add Food Coloring. Add red food coloring to one bowl. Repeat with the green food coloring in the second bowl and leave the 3rd bowl as is.

    Chef's Note: The mixture will be thick but you will able to pipe it.

    Red, green and white Christmas candy sprinkle mixtures in piping bags.

    Step 3. Prep Piping Bags. Transfer the mixture into 3 piping bags with #4 Wilton tips (you will have three colors: red, green and white).

    Christmas candy sprinkle lines drying on wax paper lined baking sheet.

    Step 4. Draw Lines. Using your piping bag, draw long, thin, horizontal lines across the wax paper.

    Chef's Note: If you only have one tip, you will have to do one color at a time.

    Christmas candy dots drying on wax paper.

    Step 5. Make Dots. You can also make some small dots or other shapes if desired. Do this with each color.

    Christmas candy dots dried on wax paper.

    Step 6. Set. Let sit for at least 12 hours or overnight so they can dry and harden. Once dried, peel off the dots and/or other shapes you made.

    Christmas candy sprinkles on wax paper.

    Step 7. Cut. Use a knife to cut the horizontal lines into small Christmas sprinkles. You can also use your hands to easily break them apart.

    Christmas baking sprinkles in jar with candle on the side.

    Step 8. Store. Transfer the homemade Christmas sprinkles to a small, airtight container. Use the Christmas sprinkles for your Christmas baking, desserts, drinks and more!

    Joss' Top Tips

    • Don't touch the wax paper with the tip. Try to keep the piping tip about ½" above the wax paper when piping. The tip shouldn't touch the wax paper or it will be hard to get lines with even thickness.
    • Pipe with ease. It may seem hard to get momentum at first when piping this thick mixture through the tip, but once the bag warms in your hand a little, it gets easier!
    • Cut the wax paper. After the lines have dried, you may find it easier to cut the sheets of wax paper into 2 to 3 pieces with scissors before transferring to a cutting board. Then you can proceed with cutting the lines into sprinkles.
    • Achieve vivid colors that last. One thing to keep in mind when adding your food coloring is that the color may fade slightly as the Christmas sprinkles dry, so be sure to add extra coloring if you want to maintain a deep and vibrant color.
    • Don't stress if you don't have a piping bag. If you do not have piping bags, cutting the tip of a sandwich bag will work in a pinch; just be extra careful not to make the hole too large.
    • Adjust your speed as you pipe out the sprinkles; you want your lines to be relatively thin and even. Keep it moving for straighter lines, but do not worry too much about making them perfect, since you will be chopping them into small pieces anyway and imperfection equals character.

    Homemade Christmas Sprinkles FAQs

    How should they be stored?

    These Christmas sprinkles will keep for several weeks in your pantry, so you could easily prepare a batch early in the season and keep using them for holiday festivities as needed.

    What should they be stored in?

    A small glass jar works well but you can also use sandwich bags or small plastic containers.

    Are they edible?

    Yes! You can eat these sprinkles. They are sweet and delicious!

    Christmas candy sprinkles in decorated jar.

    More Holiday Treats You Will Love

    • Cranberry white chocolate cake pops sprinkled with cinnamon in decorative jar.
      Cranberry White Chocolate Cake Pops
    • Coffee cake loaf with Christmas decorations.
      Christmas Coffee Cake
    • Christmas spice cake pops with beige ribbons tied around the treat stick.
      Christmas Spice Cake Pops
    • Cranberry biscotti scattered on baking rack.
      Cranberry Biscotti

    If you tried this Homemade Christmas Sprinkles Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Christmas sprinkles in jar with red ribbon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Homemade Christmas Sprinkles

    With this recipe, you can have festive red, green and white, edible Christmas sprinkles on hand to use in a myriad of different holiday desserts.
    Course Dessert, garnish
    Cuisine American, Canadian
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Resting Time 12 hours hours
    Total Time 12 hours hours 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 tablespoons
    Calories 50kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Piping bag
    • #4 Wilton tip
    • Wax paper

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups powdered sugar
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    • 2 tablespoons lukewarm water
    • 1 tablespoon light corn syrup or agave nectar
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract optional - or you can pick another holiday flavor like peppermint or cinnamon
    • red and green food coloring can use gel or liquid
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Lay a few pieces of wax paper out on the counter. In a medium bowl, combine the powdered sugar, cornstarch, water, syrup and extract together until smooth. Divide the mix into three separate bowls.
      1 ½ cups powdered sugar, 1 tablespoon cornstarch, 2 tablespoons lukewarm water, 1 tablespoon light corn syrup or agave nectar, ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • Add red food coloring to one bowl and combine until desired color is reached. Repeat with the green food coloring in the second bowl and leave the 3rd bowl as is. The mixture will be thick but you will able to pipe it.
    • Transfer the mixture into 3 piping bags with #4 Wilton tips (you will have three colors: red, green and white). If you only have one tip, you will have to do one color at a time.
    • Using your piping bag, draw long, thin, horizontal lines across the wax paper. You can also make some small dots or other shapes if desired. Do this with each color. Let sit for at least 12 hours or overnight so they can dry and harden.
    • Once dried, peel off the dots and/or other shapes you made. Use a knife to cut the horizontal lines into small sprinkles (or just use your hands to break them apart). Transfer to a small, airtight container.
    • Use these Christmas candy sprinkles for your Christmas baking, desserts and drinks!

    Video

    Notes

    • Yield: This recipe yields about 1 cup sprinkles.
    • Piping Tip Size: A smaller tip like #3 will give you finer sprinkles, but it will be harder to pipe.
    • Piping Tip: Try to keep the piping tip about ½" above the wax paper when piping. The tip shouldn't touch the wax paper. Keep it moving for straighter lines.
    • Alternative to Piping Bag: If you do not have piping bags, cutting the tip of a sandwich bag will work in a pinch; just be extra careful not to make the hole too large.
    • Wax Paper Tip: To making cutting easier once the candy lines have dried, I like to cut the wax paper sheets into 2 to 3 pieces with scissors and then transfer to a cutting board.
    • Storage: These sprinkles will keep for several weeks in your pantry, so you could easily prepare a batch early in the season and keep using them for holiday festivities as needed. A small glass jar works well but you can also use sandwich bags or small plastic containers.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 50kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 0.001g | Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 0.4mg | Fiber: 0.004g | Sugar: 12g | Calcium: 0.3mg | Iron: 0.01mg

    Slow Cooker Bison Chili

    November 30, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    This slow cooker bison chili should be added to the meal rotation in every household! This hearty chili is the definition of comfort food and with a total prep time of 10 minutes, it also makes an excellent weeknight dinner or camping meal.

    Top view of ground bison chili with cheese, jalapenos, sour cream and cilantro in black bowl.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Bison Chili Details

    This chili is easy to make, as you're simply going to sauté some vegetables and brown the bison before adding everything to the slow cooker. I also give instructions for skipping the pre-cooking steps if you want to make this dinner even easier and with less dishes.

    You can add whatever toppings you want but I've included some of my favorites if you want to give those a try.

    I love using ground bison in many recipes like my bison tacos, bison burgers and bison meatloaf, for its taste and texture and the fact that it isn't very greasy. You can also check out more of my bison recipes.

    Featured Comment

    From Ronnie: "Great recipe. Everything's better with bison."

    Ingredients

    Bison chili ingredients prepped and labeled.
    • ground bison meat - Check out my notes on where to find bison meat below.
    • olive oil - To sauté the vegetables. You can also swap it out with canola oil.
    • chili powder - A combination of dried chiles and spices including smoked paprika, cumin and oregano.
    • canned diced tomatoes - If you're trying to cut back on salt, go for the diced tomatoes with no added salt and season to your liking instead.
    • vegetable broth - You can substitute with bison broth or beef broth.
    • optional Toppings: shredded cheddar cheese, sour cream, jalapeños, cilantro, hot sauce

    *Check recipe card for ingredient amounts.

    Where to Get Bison Meat

    • Ground bison is a healthy choice for a protein source since it contains a higher protein content with fewer calories and lower saturated fat than beef. Because of this, bison meat is booming in popularity and has become much more widely available in grocery stores.
    • You may even be able to find it at a local farmers market, as many farmers have decided to make the switch to raising bison instead of traditional beef cattle. Some ranchers also offer home delivery, making it a convenient way to eat local.
    • Bison are hardy animals that are kept on pasture, so they are usually grass-fed and sustainably raised.

    Recipe Variations

    Feel free to dress up this crock pot bison chili any way you like.

    • Fresh jalapeños or other pepper varieties can give your dish a nice kick, and so can a dash of cayenne powder if fresh peppers are not available.
    • Sliced avocado is another excellent topping.
    • If you would like this bison chili to be thicker, you can add one small can of tomato paste to the slow cooker with the other ingredients.
    • Omit the beans (great for keto).

    How to Make Slow Cooker Bison Chili

    Cooked vegetables and spices in slow cooker.

    Step 1. Sauté the vegetables. Heat the olive oil in a large skillet. Add the onions and green pepper. Sauté for 3 minutes. Add the garlic and spices and sauté for 30 seconds. Add them to the slow cooker.

    Cooked ground bison and veggies in slow cooker.

    Step 2. Brown the ground bison. Return the skillet to medium heat and brown the ground bison. Add it to the slow cooker.

    Chef's Note: If you are doubling the recipe, you do not need to double the oil. 1 tablespoon is enough to fry the vegetables.

    Bison chili in slow cooker with cilantro, cheese and jalapeno slices on the side.

    Step 3. Cook in slow cooker. Stir in the diced tomatoes, vegetable broth and kidney beans. Season with some salt and pepper. Cover with the lid and cook on low heat for 4 to 6 hours. Adjust the seasoning, if necessary.

    Bison chili with cheese, jalapenos and cilantro in black bowl.

    Step 4. Serve. Serve the slow cooker bison chili in bowls with the toppings.

    Joss' Top Tip

    To make this recipe even easier and quicker, you can skip the extra steps of sautéing the vegetables and browning the ground bison (there is also no need for the olive oil if you skip these steps). Just keep in mind that the vegetables might not be as softened and flavorful as you like.

    Bison is fairly lean, so there is likely no need to drain the fat once its cooked. This makes it possible to add it straight to the slow cooker instead of browning first, if desired. You will still need to crumble it as it cooks in the slow cooker, however.

    Bison Chili FAQs

    How long do leftovers last?

    You may store leftovers in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days and reheat it to serve.

    Can you freeze the leftovers?

    Yes, absolutely! Chili freezes well in airtight containers and can be stored in the freezer for several months. Simply thaw it in the fridge overnight and then reheat it on the stove. In our house, it's the best way to warm up on a cold fall or winter night.

    Can I use frozen bison?

    Yes. I frequently use frozen bison because that is how I receive it direct from the farmer. Be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight on the bottom shelf of the fridge to avoid leakage onto other foods.

    Bison chili with cheese and cilantro in black bowls.

    More Mouthwatering Bison Recipes

    • Sliced bison roast on white serving dish with vegetables.
      Slow Cooker Bison Roast
    • Bison stew in bowl with fresh thyme.
      Bison Stew
    • Bison chanterelle mushroom meat sauce in jar.
      Bison and Chanterelle Meat Sauce
    • Bison meatballs with BBQ sauce and parsley.
      Bison Meatballs

    If you tried this Slow Cooker Bison Chili Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Bison chili with toppings in cast iron dish.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Slow Cooker Bison Chili

    This hearty, slow cooker bison chili is the definition of comfort food and with a total prep time of 10 minutes, it also makes an excellent weeknight dinner or camping meal.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American, Canadian, Mexican
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 4 hours hours 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 4 hours hours 18 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 427kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Slow cooker

    Ingredients

    For the Chili

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 large yellow onion diced
    • 1 green bell pepper diced
    • 3 cloves garlic minced
    • 2 tablespoons chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
    • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
    • 1 pound ground bison meat
    • 3 cups canned diced tomatoes
    • 1 cup vegetable broth
    • 2 cups canned red kidney beans drained and rinsed
    • salt and freshly ground black pepper to taste

    Optional Toppings

    • cheddar cheese shredded
    • sour cream
    • jalapeños sliced
    • fresh cilantro chopped
    • hot sauce
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat.
      1 tablespoon olive oil
    • Add the onions and green pepper. Sauté for 3 minutes. Add the garlic, chili powder, cumin and oregano and sauté for 30 seconds. Add them to the slow cooker.
      1 large yellow onion, 1 green bell pepper, 3 cloves garlic, 2 tablespoons chili powder, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon dried oregano
    • Return skillet to medium heat and brown the ground bison, crumbling it as it cooks. Add it to the slow cooker.
      1 pound ground bison meat
    • Stir in the diced tomatoes, vegetable broth and kidney beans. Season with some salt and pepper.
      3 cups canned diced tomatoes, 1 cup vegetable broth, 2 cups canned red kidney beans
    • Cover with the lid and cook on low heat for 4 to 6 hours. Adjust the seasoning, if necessary.
    • Serve in bowls with the toppings.

    Notes

    • For a thicker chili: If you would like it to be thicker, you can add one small can of tomato paste. Or, blend the diced tomatoes before adding them to the slow cooker.
    • Fridge storage: You may store leftovers in the refrigerator for 3-4 days and reheat it to serve.
    • Freezer storage: Chili freezes well in airtight containers and can be stored in the freezer for several months. Simply thaw it in the fridge overnight and then reheat it on the stove.
    • Frozen bison: You can use frozen bison but be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight on the bottom shelf of the fridge to avoid leakage onto other foods.
    • Oil amount: If you are doubling the recipe, you do not need to double the oil. 1 tablespoon is enough to fry the vegetables.
    • To make this recipe even easier and quicker:
      • You can skip the extra steps of sautéing the vegetables and browning the ground bison (and no need for the olive oil if you skip these steps). Just keep in mind that the vegetables might not be as softened and flavorful as you like.
      • Bison is fairly lean, so there is no need to drain the fat once its cooked. This makes it possible to add it straight to the slow cooker instead of browning first, if desired. You will still need to crumble it as it cooks in the slow cooker, however.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 427kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 863mg | Potassium: 1123mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1643IU | Vitamin C: 45mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 7mg

    Electric Skillet Stuffed Puff Pastry Triangles

    November 29, 2022 by Joss Dyckson 3 Comments

    Puff pastry triangles are stuffed with a goat cheese and red bell pepper filling and baked in the electric skillet. With only a few ingredients, you can have this simple but delicious appetizer on the table in no time.

    Goat cheese triangles on a black serving dish - close up.

    I sauté fresh bell peppers in this recipe but if you want to elevate these cheesy triangles, these grilled bell peppers would also taste amazing!

    Whether you are making them at home or on a camping trip, they bring something a little more unique to the table in terms of what you can make in an electric frying pan.

    I also make these electric skillet nachos and electric skillet coconut shrimp that make great appetizers as well. And, if you're new to this appliance, be sure to check out these ceramic electric skillet reviews and a guide on electric skillet temperatures.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    🥘 Ingredients

    Stuffed puff pastry triangle ingredients labeled on wooden background.
    • olive oil - Regular olive oil works fine. No need to splurge on EVOO.
    • red bell pepper - You could switch it up with your favorite color bell pepper if you wanted.
    • puff pastry - You can find puff pastry in the frozen section. It comes in a box of sheets, although this has been increasingly harder to find so if you can only find rounds or squares of frozen puff pastry, that is okay too; it will just need to be rolled out.
    • goat cheese - The goat cheese has a tangy, slightly earthy flavor that complements the flavor of the bell peppers and the texture of the flaky puff pastry.
    • egg - This is optional. When brushed on the pastry, it gives it a nice golden color and shine.

    *See ingredient amounts in recipe card.

    🍽 Tools

    You will need a small baking rack (about 6" to 9" wide if using a 12" skillet) and a baking dish that fits in your electric skillet. If you don't have one yet, I have a post reviewing the best stainless steel electric skillets and general electric skillet reviews.

    🔪 How to Make Skillet Stuffed Puff Pastry Triangles

    Diced red bell peppers in electric frying pan.

    Step #1. Sauté Peppers. Preheat the electric skillet to 400ºF and add the olive oil. Sauté the peppers in the skillet for 2 minutes. Reserve and let the skillet cool.

    Puff pastry triangles stuffed with cheese and red peppers on board.

    Step #2. Fill & Fold the Puff Pastry. Cut the puff pastry into 9 squares. Fill them with the peppers and goat cheese on one diagonal half. Fold them over to make triangles, pressing the sides together as good as you can.

    Chef's Note: It's okay if they are not fully closed! I actually find it more presentable if you can see some of the filling poking out.

    Puff pastry triangles in baking pan getting brushed with egg.

    Step #3. Brush With Egg. Place them in a small, non-stick baking dish or sheet that fits in your electric skillet. Brush them with the egg, using a pastry brush.

    Small baking rack inside of an electric skillet.

    Step #4. Add Rack. Remove any excess oil. Place a small baking rack in the skillet and place the baking dish on top, so that the baking dish doesn't touch the bottom of the skillet.

    Chef's Note: Alternatively, you could place a few metal skewers on the bottom of the skillet and then place the baking sheet on top. This is helpful if you can't fit the lid over the baking sheet.

    Puff pastry triangles in baking pan in electric skillet.

    Step #5. Bake. Bake them at 400ºF with the lid securely on the skillet for 25 minutes. Turn them over and cook 10 more minutes - or until golden on both sides.

    Goat cheese triangles on a black serving dish - top view.

    Step #6. Serve. Let the stuffed puff pastry triangles cool for a few minutes and serve!

    🍴 Serving Suggestions

    Make sure to let the triangles cool for a few minutes after baking as they will be quite hot inside. Then, arrange them on a nice serving dish/platter, add a few dip options and serve.

    This savory, electric skillet appetizer goes well with dips that are more so on the sweet side like sweet and sour, honey dill sauce, sweet chili sauce or even cranberry sauce, chutney and low sugar peach jam.

    🌡️ Storage

    Store leftover triangles in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 3 to 5 days. You can also freeze them for a couple of weeks.

    They can be reheated in the electric frying pan, microwave or oven. If you reheat them in the microwave they will be soft, whereas the oven/pan will make them nice and crispy again!

    Goat cheese triangles on a black serving dish.

    ❤️ More Electric Skillet Recipes to Try

    • English muffin sandwiches stacked on purple plate.
      Electric Skillet English Muffins
    • Seafood chowder in a bowl with wooden fish on the side.
      Electric Skillet Seafood Chowder
    • Top view of mulled wine with orange slices and cinnamon sticks.
      Electric Skillet Mulled Wine
    • Piece of lasagna on a plate.
      Electric Skillet Lasagna

    If you tried this Electric Skillet Stuffed Puff Pastry Triangles Recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. And please share the recipe!

    📋Recipe

    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Electric Skillet Stuffed Puff Pastry Triangles

    These puff pastry triangles are stuffed with a goat cheese and red bell pepper filling and baked in the electric skillet.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Diet Low Salt
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 37 minutes minutes
    Total Time 52 minutes minutes
    Servings 9 triangles
    Calories 189kcal
    Author Joss Dyckson

    Equipment

    • Electric Skillet
    • Small baking rack
    • Pastry brush

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • ½ red bell pepper diced
    • 1 sheet puff pastry (8 ounces) thawed
    • ¼ cup goat cheese
    • 1 egg beaten
    • salt and pepper to taste
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • Heat electric skillet to 400ºF and add the olive oil. Sauté the peppers in the skillet for 2 minutes. Reserve and let the skillet cool.
      1 tablespoon olive oil, ½ red bell pepper
    • Cut the puff pastry sheet into 9 equal squares. Fill them with the peppers, goat cheese, salt and pepper on one diagonal half.
      1 sheet puff pastry, ¼ cup goat cheese
    • Fold them over to make triangles, pressing the sides together as good as you can. It's okay if they are not fully closed.
    • I like to blot out any remaining oil in the cooled skillet with some paper towel and discard. Then, reheat the skillet to 400ºF.
    • Place the triangles in a small, non-stick, lightly greased baking dish or sheet that fits in your electric skillet. Brush them with the egg, using a pastry brush.
      1 egg
    • Place a small baking rack in the skillet and place the baking dish on top, so that the baking dish doesn't touch the bottom of the skillet. (Alternatively, you could place a few metal skewers on the bottom of the skillet and then place the baking sheet on top. This is helpful if you can't fit the lid over the baking sheet.)
    • Cook them with the lid securely on the skillet for 25 minutes. Turn them over and cook 10 more minutes - or until golden on both sides. Keep an eye on them.
    • Let cool for a few minutes and serve.

    Notes

    • You will need to find a small baking rack and baking dish that fit in your electric skillet.
    • If your puff pastry requires rolling, roll it into a 10" to 12" square.
    • This savory, electric skillet appetizer goes well with dips that are more so on the sweet side like sweet and sour, sweet chili sauce or even cranberry sauce.
    • Store leftover triangles in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 3 to 5 days. You can also freeze them for a couple of weeks.
    • They can be reheated in the electric frying pan, microwave or oven. If you reheat them in the microwave they will be soft, whereas the oven/pan will make them nice and crispy again!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 189kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 21mg | Sodium: 98mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 299IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
    « Previous Page
    Next Page »
    Joss Dyckson author photo.

    Hi, I'm Joss!

    I am the creator and editor of In the Kitch. I am inviting you on this food journey with me to learn, grow and bring out that inner chef in you. I hope to inspire you to get creative in your own kitchen!

    More about me →

    Patriotic Recipes

    • 4th of July themed charcuterie board on red plate with red, white and blue stars.
      4th of July Charcuterie Board
    • Grilled burgers on metal flipper, grill grates in the background.
      How to Grill Frozen Burgers
    • Blueberry mojito mocktail with fresh mint in cocktail glass.
      Blueberry Mojito Mocktail
    • 4th of July pulled pork sliders on parchment lined serving tray.
      4th of July Pulled Pork Sliders
    • Canada Day raspberry cheesecake in jars with red and white spoons.
      Raspberry Cheesecake in a Jar (Canada Day Dessert)
    • Watermelon basil cocktail in wine glass with watermelon swizzle stick.
      Frozen Watermelon Basil Cocktail

    Popular

    • Cake pop frosting in bowl with spatula.
      Cake Pop Frosting & Coating
    • Collage of coffee syrups.
      12 Coffee Syrup Recipes to Upgrade Your Brew
    • Pictures of passion fruit recipes collage.
      16 Easy Passion Fruit Recipes To Make This Summer
    • BBQ buffalo wings in dish with sauce on the side.
      37 Easy and Delicious Electric Skillet Recipes
    • Peanut butter soup in a speckled bowl.
      Peanut Butter Soup
    • Corn tortillas on foil.
      How to Heat Corn Tortillas (3 Ways)

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    In the Kitch

    • Privacy Policy
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Disclaimer
    • Accessibility Statement

    About

    • About
    • The Team

    Contact

    • Contact

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 In the Kitch

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required